HGST TRAVELSTAR 80GN 30GB ATA5 Specification


Add to my manuals
214 Pages

advertisement

HGST TRAVELSTAR 80GN 30GB ATA5 Specification | Manualzz

Hitachi Global Storage Technologies

Hard Disk Drive Specification

Hitachi Travelstar 80GN

2.5 inch ATA/IDE hard disk drive

Models: IC25N020ATMR04

IC25N030ATMR04

IC25N040ATMR04

IC25N060ATMR04

IC25N080ATMR04

Revision 2.0

19 September 2003

Document Part # S13K-1055-20 Publication Number 1550

Hard Disk Drive Specification

Travelstar 80GN

2.5 inch ATA/IDE hard disk drive

Models: IC25N020ATMR04

IC25N030ATMR04

IC25N040ATMR04

IC25N060ATMR04

IC25N080ATMR04

Revision 2.0

19 September 2003

Document Part # S13K-1055-20 Publication Number 1550

Hitachi Global Storage Technologies

1st Edition (Revision 0.1) Sxxx-xxxx-01 (1 December 2002) Preliminary

2nd Edition (Revision 0.2) Sxxx-xxxx-01 (27 Feburary 2003) Preliminary

3rd Edition (Revision 0.3) S13K-1055-03(7 March 2003) Preliminary

4th Edition (Revision 0.4) S13K-1055-04(7 March 2003) Preliminary

5th Edition (Revision 0.5) S13K-1055-05(7 March 2003) Preliminary

6th Edition (Revision 1.0) S13K-1055-10(7 March 2003) Revision

7th Edition (Revision 1.1) S13K-1055-11(13 March 2003) Revision

8th Edition (Revision 1.2) S13K-1055-12(17 June 2003) Revision

9th Edition (Revision 1.3) S13K-1055-13(18 June 2003) Revision

10th Edition (Revision 1.4) S13K-1055-14(26 June 2003) Revision

11th Edition (Revision 1.5) S13K-1055-15(14 July 2003) Revision

12th Edition (Revision 1.6) S13K-1055-16(29 August 2003) Revision

13th Edition (Revision 1.7) S13K-1055-17 (02 September 2003) Revision

14th Edition (Revision 2.0) S13K-1055-20 (19 September 2003) Final

The following paragraph does not apply to the United Kingdom or any country where such provisions are inconsistent with local law: HITACHI GLOBAL STORAGE TECHNOLOGIES PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION "AS IS"

WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED

TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

Some states do not allow disclaimer or express or implied warranties in certain transactions, therefore, this statement may not apply to you.

This publication could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are periodically made to the information herein; these changes will be incorporated in new editions of the publication. Hitachi may make improvements or changes in any products or programs described in this publication at any time.

It is possible that this publication may contain reference to, or information about, Hitachi products (machines and programs), programming, or services that are not announced in your country. Such references or information must not be construed to mean that Hitachi intends to announce such Hitachi products, programming, or services in your country.

Technical information about this product is available by contacting your local Hitachi Global Storage Technologies representative or on the Internet at http://www.hgst.com

Hitachi Global Storage Technologies may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter in this document. The furnishing of this document does not give you any license to these patents.

©Copyright Hitachi Globlal Storage Technologies

Note to U.S. Government Users —Documentation related to restricted rights —Use, duplication or disclosure is subject to restrictions set forth in GSA ADP Schedule Contract with Hitachi Global Storage Technologies.

Hitachi Global Storage Technologies

Table of Contents

1.0 General........................................................................................................................................5

1.1 Introduction............................................................................................................................5

1.2 References..............................................................................................................................5

1.3 Abbreviations.........................................................................................................................5

1.4 Caution...................................................................................................................................7

1.5 Drive handling precautions ....................................................................................................8

2.0 Outline of the drive ....................................................................................................................9

3.0 Fixed-disk subsystem description.............................................................................................13

3.1 Control electronics .................................................................................................................13

3.2 Head disk assembly data........................................................................................................13

4.0 Drive characteristics ..................................................................................................................15

4.1 Formatted capacity.................................................................................................................15

4.2 Data sheet...............................................................................................................................15

4.3 Cylinder allocation.................................................................................................................16

4.4 Performance characteristics ...................................................................................................17

4.4.1 Command overhead ......................................................................................................17

4.4.2 Mechanical positioning.................................................................................................17

4.4.3 Operating modes ...........................................................................................................19

5.0 Data integrity..............................................................................................................................21

5.1 Data loss at power off ............................................................................................................21

5.2 Write Cache ...........................................................................................................................21

5.3 Equipment status....................................................................................................................21

5.4 WRITE safety ........................................................................................................................22

5.5 Data buffer test.......................................................................................................................22

5.6 Error recovery ........................................................................................................................22

5.7 Automatic reallocation...........................................................................................................22

5.7.1 Nonrecovered write errors ............................................................................................22

5.7.2 Nonrecoverable read error ............................................................................................22

5.7.3 Recovered read errors ...................................................................................................22

5.8 ECC........................................................................................................................................23

6.0 Specification ...............................................................................................................................25

6.1 Environment...........................................................................................................................25

6.1.1 Temperature and humidity............................................................................................25

6.1.2 Radiation noise .............................................................................................................26

6.1.3 Conductive noise...........................................................................................................27

6.1.4 Magnetic fields .............................................................................................................27

6.2 DC power requirements .........................................................................................................27

6.2.1 Power consumption efficiency......................................................................................28

6.3 Reliability...............................................................................................................................28

6.3.1 Data Reliability .............................................................................................................28

6.3.2 Failure prediction (S.M.A.R.T.) ...................................................................................28

6.3.3 Cable noise interference................................................................................................28

6.3.4 Service life and usage condition ...................................................................................29

6.3.5 Preventive maintenance ................................................................................................29

6.3.6 Load/unload ..................................................................................................................29

6.4 Mechanical specifications......................................................................................................31

6.4.1 Physical dimensions and weight ...................................................................................31

6.4.2 Mounting hole locations ...............................................................................................32

6.4.3 Connector and jumper description ................................................................................32

6.4.4 Mounting orientation ....................................................................................................33

6.4.5 Load/unload mechanism ...............................................................................................33

6.5 Vibration and shock ...............................................................................................................33

6.5.1 Operating vibration .......................................................................................................33

6.5.2 Nonoperating vibration .................................................................................................34

6.5.3 Operating shock ............................................................................................................34

6.5.4 Nonoperating shock ......................................................................................................35

6.6 Acoustics................................................................................................................................35

6.6.1 Sound power levels .......................................................................................................35

6.6.2 Discrete tone penalty ....................................................................................................36

6.7 Identification labels................................................................................................................36

6.8 Electromagnetic compatibility ...............................................................................................36

6.8.1 CE mark ........................................................................................................................36

6.8.2 C-TICK mark ................................................................................................................36

6.8.3 BSMI mark ...................................................................................................................36

6.8.4 MIC mark......................................................................................................................37

6.9 Safety .....................................................................................................................................37

6.9.1 UL and CSA approval...................................................................................................37

6.9.2 IEC compliance.............................................................................................................37

6.9.3 German safety mark......................................................................................................37

6.9.4 Flammability .................................................................................................................37

6.9.5 Secondary circuit protection .........................................................................................37

6.10 Packaging.............................................................................................................................37

7.0 Electrical interface specification...............................................................................................39

7.1 Cabling...................................................................................................................................39

7.2 Interface connector.................................................................................................................39

7.3 Signal definitions ...................................................................................................................40

7.4 Signal descriptions .................................................................................................................41

7.5 Interface logic signal levels ...................................................................................................44

7.6 Reset timings..........................................................................................................................44

7.7 PIO timings ............................................................................................................................45

7.8 Multi word DMA timings ......................................................................................................46

7.9 Ultra DMA timings ................................................................................................................47

7.9.1 Initiating Read DMA ....................................................................................................47

7.9.2 Host Pausing Read DMA..............................................................................................48

7.9.3 Host Terminating Read DMA.......................................................................................49

7.9.4 Device Terminating Read DMA...................................................................................50

7.9.5 Initiating Write DMA ...................................................................................................51

7.9.6 Device Pausing Write DMA .........................................................................................52

Hitachi Global Storage Technologies

7.9.7 Device Terminating Write DMA ..................................................................................53

7.9.8 Host Terminating Write DMA......................................................................................54

7.10 Drive address setting............................................................................................................55

7.11 Addressing of HDD registers...............................................................................................56

8.0 General........................................................................................................................................59

8.1 Introduction............................................................................................................................59

8.2 Terminology...........................................................................................................................59

9.0 Deviations from standard..........................................................................................................61

10.0 Register .....................................................................................................................................63

10.1 Alternate Status Register .....................................................................................................64

10.2 Command Register ..............................................................................................................64

10.3 Data Register........................................................................................................................64

10.4 Device Control Register......................................................................................................65

10.5 Drive Address Register ........................................................................................................65

10.6 Device/Head Register .........................................................................................................66

10.7 Error Register.......................................................................................................................66

10.8 Features Register..................................................................................................................67

10.9 LBA High Register ..............................................................................................................67

10.10 LBA Mid Register .............................................................................................................67

10.11 Sector Count Register ........................................................................................................67

10.12 Status Register ...................................................................................................................67

11.0 General......................................................................................................................................69

11.1 Reset response......................................................................................................................69

11.2 Register initialization ...........................................................................................................70

11.3 Diagnostic and Reset considerations ...................................................................................71

11.4 Power-off considerations .....................................................................................................72

11.4.1 Load/Unload ...............................................................................................................72

11.4.2 Emergency unload ......................................................................................................72

11.4.3 Required power-off sequence .....................................................................................72

11.5 Sector Addressing Mode......................................................................................................73

11.5.1 Logical CHS addressing mode ...................................................................................73

11.5.2 LBA addressing mode ................................................................................................73

11.6 Power management features ................................................................................................74

11.6.1 Power mode ................................................................................................................74

11.6.2 Power management commands ..................................................................................74

11.6.3 Standby/Sleep command completion time .................................................................74

11.6.4 Standby timer ..............................................................................................................75

11.6.5 Status...........................................................................................................................75

11.6.6 Interface capability for power modes .........................................................................75

11.6.7 Initial Power Mode at Power On ................................................................................75

11.7 Advanced Power Management (ABLE-3) feature...............................................................75

11.7.1 Performance Idle Mode ..............................................................................................76

11.7.2 Active Idle Mode ........................................................................................................76

11.7.3 Low Power Idle Mode ................................................................................................76

11.7.4 Transition time ............................................................................................................76

11.8 S.M.A.R.T. Function ...........................................................................................................77

11.8.1 Attributes ....................................................................................................................77

11.8.2 Attribute values...........................................................................................................77

11.8.3 Attribute thresholds.....................................................................................................77

11.8.4 Threshold exceeded condition ....................................................................................77

11.8.5 S.M.A.R.T. commands ...............................................................................................77

11.8.6 S.M.A.R.T. operation with power management modes..............................................78

11.9 Security Mode Feature Set...................................................................................................78

11.9.1 Security mode .............................................................................................................78

11.9.2 Security level ..............................................................................................................78

11.9.3 Password .....................................................................................................................79

11.9.4 Master Password Revision Code ................................................................................79

11.9.5 Command table ...........................................................................................................82

11.10 Protected Area Function ....................................................................................................83

11.10.1 Example for operation (In LBA Mode) ....................................................................83

11.10.2 Set Max security extension commands.....................................................................84

11.11 Address Offset Feature (vendor specific) ..........................................................................85

11.11.1 Enable/Disable Address Offset Mode.......................................................................85

11.11.2 Identify Device Data .................................................................................................86

11.11.3 Exceptions in Address Offset Mode ........................................................................86

11.12 Seek Overlap......................................................................................................................87

11.13 Write Cache function .........................................................................................................87

11.14 Reassign Function..............................................................................................................88

11.14.1 Auto Reassign Function...........................................................................................88

11.15 48-bit Address Feature Set................................................................................................89

12.0 Command protocol ..................................................................................................................91

12.1 Data In commands ...............................................................................................................91

12.2 Data Out Commands............................................................................................................92

12.3 Non-data commands ...........................................................................................................93

12.4 DMA Data Transfer commands:.........................................................................................95

13.0 Command descriptions............................................................................................................97

13.1 Check Power Mode (E5h/98h) ............................................................................................101

13.2 Device Configuration Overlay (B1h) ..................................................................................102

13.2.1 DEVICE CONFIGURATION RESTORE (subcommand C0h) ...............................102

13.2.2 DEVICE CONFIGURATION FREEZE LOCK (subcommand C1h)........................102

13.2.3 DEVICE CONFIGURATION IDENTIFY (subcommand C2h)...............................103

13.2.4 DEVICE CONFIGURATION SET (subcommand C3h) ...........................................103

13.3 Execute Device Diagnostic (90h) ........................................................................................105

13.4 Flush Cache (E7h) ...............................................................................................................106

13.5 Flush Cache EXT (EAh)......................................................................................................107

13.6 Format Track (50h: vendor specific) ...................................................................................108

13.7 Format Unit (F7h: vendor specific) .....................................................................................109

13.8 Identify Device (ECh)..........................................................................................................110

13.9 Idle (E3h/97h) .....................................................................................................................119

13.10 Idle Immediate (E1h/95h) ..................................................................................................120

13.11 Initialize Device Parameters (91h).....................................................................................122

13.12 Read Buffer (E4h)..............................................................................................................123

Hitachi Global Storage Technologies

13.13 Read DMA (C8h/C9h).......................................................................................................124

13.14 Read DMA EXT (25h) ......................................................................................................126

13.15 Read Long (22h/23h) .........................................................................................................128

13.16 Read Multiple (C4h) ..........................................................................................................130

13.17 Read Multiple EXT (29h) ..................................................................................................132

13.18 Read Native Max ADDRESS (F8h) ..................................................................................133

13.19 Read Native Max ADDRESS EXT (27h)..........................................................................134

13.20 Read Sectors (20h/21h)......................................................................................................135

13.21 Read Sector(s) EXT (24h) .................................................................................................136

13.22 Read Verify Sectors (40h/41h) ..........................................................................................138

13.23 Ready Verify Sector(s) EXT (42h) ....................................................................................140

13.24 Recalibrate (1xh)................................................................................................................142

13.25 Security Disable Password (F6h).......................................................................................143

13.26 Security Disable Password (F6h).......................................................................................144

13.27 Security Erase Unit (F4h) ..................................................................................................145

13.28 Security Freeze Lock (F5h) ...............................................................................................147

13.29 Security Set Password (F1h)..............................................................................................148

13.30 Security Unlock (F2h) .......................................................................................................150

13.31 Seek (7xh) .........................................................................................................................151

13.32 Sense Condition (F0h: vendor specific).............................................................................152

13.33 Set Features (EFh) .............................................................................................................153

13.34 Set Max ADDRESS (F9h) .................................................................................................155

13.35 Set Max ADDRESS EXT (37h) ........................................................................................157

13.36 Set Multiple (C9h) .............................................................................................................159

13.37 Sleep (E6h/99h) .................................................................................................................160

13.38 S.M.A.R.T. Function Set (B0h) .........................................................................................161

13.38.1 S.M.A.R.T. Function Subcommands .......................................................................162

13.38.2 Device Attribute Data Structure ...............................................................................166

13.38.3 Device Attribute Thresholds data structure ..............................................................171

13.38.4 S.M.A.R.T. error log sector ......................................................................................172

13.38.5 Self-test log data structure .......................................................................................174

13.38.6 Error reporting ..........................................................................................................175

13.39 Standby (E2h/96h) .............................................................................................................176

13.40 Standby Immediate (E0h/94h) ...........................................................................................177

13.41 Write Buffer (E8h).............................................................................................................178

13.42 Write DMA (CAh/CBh) ....................................................................................................179

13.43 Write DMA EXT (35h)......................................................................................................181

13.44 Write Long (32h/33h) ........................................................................................................183

13.45 Write Multiple (C5h) .........................................................................................................185

13.46 Write Multiple EXT (39h) .................................................................................................186

13.47 Write Sectors (30h/31h).....................................................................................................188

13.48 Write Sectors(s) EXT (34h) ...............................................................................................190

13.49 Write Verify (3Ch: vendor specific) ..................................................................................191

14.0 Time-out values ........................................................................................................................193

15.0 Appendix...................................................................................................................................195

15.1 Commands Support Coverage .............................................................................................195

15.2 SET FEATURES Commands Support Coverage ................................................................197

15.3 Changes from Travelstar 60GH and 40GN .........................................................................198

Hitachi Global Storage Technologies

List of Tables

Table 1: Formatted capacities ...............................................................................................15

Table 2: Data sheet ...............................................................................................................15

Table 3: Cylinder allocation .................................................................................................16

Table 4: Performance characteristics ....................................................................................17

Table 5: Mechanical positioning performance .....................................................................17

Table 6: Full stroke seek time ...............................................................................................18

Table 7: Single track seek time .............................................................................................18

Table 8: Average latency ......................................................................................................19

Table 9: Drive ready time .....................................................................................................19

Table 10: Description of operating modes ............................................................................19

Table 11: Drive ready time ...................................................................................................20

Table 12: Examples of error cases. .......................................................................................23

Table 13: Environmental condition ......................................................................................25

Table 14: Magnetic flux density limits .................................................................................26

Table 15: DC power requirements ........................................................................................27

Table 16: Power consumption efficiency .............................................................................28

Table 18: Random vibration PSD profile breakpoints (operating) .......................................33

Table 19: Swept sine vibration .............................................................................................34

Table 20: Random Vibration PSD Profile Breakpoints (nonoperating) ...............................34

Table 21: Operating shock ....................................................................................................34

Table 22: Nonoperating shock ..............................................................................................35

Table 23: Weighted sound power .........................................................................................35

Table 24: Signal definitions ..................................................................................................40

Table 25: Special signal definitions for Ultra DMA .............................................................41

Table 26: PIO cycle timings .................................................................................................45

Table 27: Multiword DMA cycle timings ............................................................................46

Table 28: Ultra DMA cycle timings (Initiating Read) ..........................................................47

Table 29: Ultra DMA cycle timings (Host Pausing Read) ...................................................48

Table 30: Ultra DMA cycle timings (Host Terminating Read) ............................................49

Table 31: Ultra DMA cycle timings (Device Terminating Read) ........................................50

Table 32: Ultra DMA cycle timing (Initiating Write) ..........................................................51

Table 33: Ultra DMA cycle timing (Device Pausing Write) ................................................52

Table 34: Ultra DMA cycle timings (Device TerminatingWrite) ........................................53

Table 35: Ultra DMA cycle timings (Host Terminating Write) ...........................................54

Table 36: I/O address map ....................................................................................................56

Table 37: Register Set ...........................................................................................................63

Table 38: Alternate Status Register ......................................................................................64

Table 39: Device Control Register .......................................................................................65

Table 40: Drive Address Register .........................................................................................65

Table 41: Device Head/Register ..........................................................................................66

Table 42: Error Register .......................................................................................................66

Table 43: Status Register ......................................................................................................67

Table 44: Reset response table ..............................................................................................69

Table 45: Default Register Values ........................................................................................70

Table 46: Diagnostic codes ...................................................................................................70

Table 47: Reset error register values ....................................................................................71

Table 48: Device behavior by ATA command .....................................................................72

Table 49: Power conditions ..................................................................................................75

Table 50: Initial setting .........................................................................................................79

Table 51: Usual operation for POR ......................................................................................80

Table 52: Password lost ........................................................................................................81

Table 53: Command table for device lock operation ...........................................................82

Table 54: Set Max SET PASSWORD data content .............................................................84

Table 55: Set Max security mode transition .........................................................................85

Table 56: Device address map before and after Set Feature .................................................86

Table 57: Seek overlap .........................................................................................................87

Table 58: Command Set (1 of 2) ..........................................................................................97

Table 59: Command Set (2 of 2) ..........................................................................................98

Table 60: Command Set (subcommand) ..............................................................................99

Table 61: Check Power Mode Commmand (E5h/98h) ........................................................101

Table 62: Check Power Mode Command (E5h/98h) ............................................................102

Table 63: Device Configuration Overlay Features register values .......................................102

Table 64: Device Configuration Overlay Data structure .....................................................104

Table 65: DCO error information definition. ........................................................................104

Table 66: Execute Device Diagnostic command (90h) ........................................................105

Table 67: Flush Cache command (E7h) ...............................................................................106

Table 68: Flush Cache command (E7h) ...............................................................................107

Table 69: Format Track command (50h) ..............................................................................108

Table 70: Format Unit command (F7h) ................................................................................109

Table 71: Identify Device command (ECh) ..........................................................................110

Table 72: Identify device information. (Part 1 of 7) ............................................................111

Table 73: Identify device information. (Part 2 of 7) ............................................................112

Table 74: Identify device information. (Part 3 of 7) ............................................................113

Table 75: Identify device information. (Part 4 of 7) ............................................................114

Table 76: Identify device information. (Part 5 of 7 ..............................................................115

Table 77: Identify device information. (Part 6 of 7) ............................................................116

Table 78: Identify device information. (Part 7 of 7) ............................................................117

Table 79: Number of cylinders/heads/sectors by model. .....................................................118

Table 80: Idle command (E3h/97h) ......................................................................................119

Table 81: Idle Immediate command (E1h/95h) ....................................................................120

Table 82: Initialize Device Parameters command (91h) ......................................................121

Table 83: Read Buffer (E4h) .................................................................................................122

Table 84: Read DMA command (C8h/C9h) .........................................................................123

Table 85: Read DMA EXT (25h) ........................................................................................125

Table 86: Read Long (22h/23h) ............................................................................................127

Table 87: Read Multiple (C4h) .............................................................................................129

Table 88: Read Multiple EXT (29h) .....................................................................................131

Table 89: Read Native Max ADDRESS (F8h) .....................................................................132

Hitachi Global Storage Technologies

Table 90: Read Native Max ADDRESS EXT (27h) ............................................................133

Table 91: Read Sectors (20h/21h) ........................................................................................134

Table 92: Read Sector(s) EXT Command (24h) ...................................................................135

Table 93: Read Verify Sectors (40h/41h) .............................................................................137

Table 94: Read Verify Sector(s) EXT Command (42h) .......................................................139

Table 95: Recalibrate (1xh) ..................................................................................................141

Table 96: Security Disable Password (F6h) .........................................................................142

Table 97: Password Information for Security Disable Password command ........................142

Table 98: Security Disable Password (F6h) .........................................................................143

Table 99: Security Erase Unit (F4h) .....................................................................................144

Table 100: Erase Unit information .......................................................................................144

Table 101: Security Freeze Lock (F5h) ................................................................................146

Table 102: Security Set Password (F1h) ...............................................................................147

Table 103: Security Set Password information ....................................................................147

Table 104: Security Unlock (F2h) ........................................................................................149

Table 105: Seek (7xh) ..........................................................................................................150

Table 106: Sense Condition (F0h: vendor specific) .............................................................151

Table 107: Set Features (EFh) ..............................................................................................152

Table 108: Set Max ADDRESS (F9h) ..................................................................................154

Table 109: Set Max ADDRESS EXT Command (37h) .......................................................156

Table 110: Set Multiple command (C6h) .............................................................................158

Table 111: Sleep (E6h/99h) ..................................................................................................159

Table 112: S.M.A.R.T. Function Set (B0h) ..........................................................................160

Table 113: Device Attribute Data Structure .........................................................................165

Table 114: Status Flag definitions ........................................................................................167

Table 115: Device Attribute Thresholds Data Structure .......................................................170

Table 116: Individual Threshold Data Structure ..................................................................170

Table 117: Command data structure ....................................................................................171

Table 118: Command data structure .....................................................................................172

Table 119: Error data structure .............................................................................................172

Table 120: Self-test log data structure ..................................................................................173

Table 121: S.M.A.R.T. Error Codes .....................................................................................174

Table 122: Standby (E2h/96h) ..............................................................................................175

Table 123: Standby Immediate (E0h/94h) ............................................................................176

Table 124: Write Buffer (E8h) ..............................................................................................177

Table 125: Write DMA (CAh/CBh) .....................................................................................178

Table 126: Write DMA (35h) ...............................................................................................180

Table 127: Write Long (32h/33h) .........................................................................................182

Table 128: Write Multiple (C5h) ..........................................................................................184

Table 129: Write Sectors Command (30h/31h) ....................................................................187

Table 130: Write Sector(s) EXT Command (34h) ................................................................189

Table 131: Time-out values ..................................................................................................191

Table 132: Command coverage (1 of 2) ...............................................................................193

Table 133: Command coverage (2 of 2) ...............................................................................194

Table 134: SET FEATURES command coverage ................................................................195

1.0 General

1.1 Introduction

This document describes the specifications of the following Travelstar 80GN, a 2.5-inch hard disk drive, ATA/IDE interface with a rotational speed of 4200 RPM and a height of 9.5 mm:

Drive Name

Travelstar 80GN

Travelstar 80GN

Travelstar 80GN

Travelstar 80GN

Travelstar 80GN

Model Number

IC25N080ATMR04

IC25N060ATMR04

IC25N040ATMR04

IC25N030ATMR04

IC25N020ATMR04

Capacity(GB) Height (mm)

80 GB 9.5

60 GB

40 GB

9.5

9.5

30 GB

20 GB

9.5

9.5

Rotational speeed

4200

4200

4200

4200

4200

Part 1 of this document beginning on page 11 defines the hardware functional specification. Part 2 of this docu-

ment beginning on page 57 defines the interface specification

These specifications are subject to change without notice.

1.2 References

ATA/ATAPI-6 (T13/1410D Revision 3b)

1.3 Abbreviations

Abbreviation Meaning

32 KB 32 x 1024 bytes

64 KB

A

64 x 1024 bytes

Ampere

AC

AT

ATA

BIOS alternating current

Advanced Technology

Advanced Technology Attachment

Basic Input/Output System

C

CSA

C-UL

Cyl

DC

DFT

DMA

ECC

EEC

EMC

ERP

Celsius

Canadian Standards Association

Canadian-Underwriters Laboratory cylinder

Direct Current

Drive Fitness Test

Direct Memory Access error correction code

European Economic Community electromagnetic compatibility

Error Recovery Procedure

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

5

PIO

POH

Pop

P/N p-p

PSD

RES

RFI

RH

% RH

HDD

Hz

I

ILS

I/O

ISO

KB

Kbpi

ESD

FCC

FRU

G

G

2

/Hz

Gb

GB

GND h

Electrostatic Discharge

Federal Communications Commission field replacement unit gravity (a unit of force)

(32 ft/sec)

2

per Hertz

1,000,000,000 bits

1,000,000,000 bytes ground hexadecimal hard disk drive

Hertz

Input integrated lead suspension

Input/Output

International Standards Organization

1,000 bytes

1000 bits per inch

MHz

MLC mm ms us, ms

No

O

OD kgf-cm kilogram (force)-centimeter

KHz kilohertz

LBA

Lw logical block addressing unit of A-weighted sound power m max

MB

Mbps meter maximum

1,000,000 bytes

1,000,000 bits per second megahertz

Machine Level Control millimeter millisecond microsecond number

Output

Open Drain Programmed Input/Output

Programmed Input/Output power on hours population part number peak-to-peak power spectral density radiated electromagnetic susceptibility radio frequency interference relative humidity per cent relative humidity

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

6

Trk

TTL

UL

V

VDE

W

3-state

RMS

RPM

RST

R/W root mean square revolutions per minute reset read/write sec

SELV second secondary low voltage

S.M.A.R.TSelf-Monitoring, Analysis, and Reporting Technology

TPI tracks per inch track transistor-transistor logic

Underwriters Laboratory volt

Verband Deutscher Electrotechniker watt transistor-transistor tristate logic

1.4 Caution

• Do not apply force to the top cover (See figure below).

• Do not cover the breathing hole on the top cover (See figure below).

• Do not touch the interface connector pins or the surface of the printed circuit board

• This drive can be damaged by electrostatic discharge (ESD). Any damages incurred to the drive after its removal from the shipping package and the ESD protective bag are the responsibility of the user.

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

7

1.5 Drive handling precautions

Do not press on the drive cover during handling.

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

8

2.0 Outline of the drive

• 2.5 inch, 9.5-mm height

• Formatted capacities of 80 GB, 60 GB, 40 GB, 30 GB, 20 GB

• 512 bytes/sector

• AT Interface (Enhanced IDE) conforming to ATA/ATAPI-6

• Integrated controller

• No-ID recording format

• Coding : 96/102 MTR

• Multi zone recording

• Enhanced ECC On-The-Fly

• 52 bytes 4 way Interleaved Reed Solomon Code

• 5 bytes per interleave On-The-Fly correction

• Segmented Buffer with write cache

8192 KB - Upper 308 KB is used for firmware (80/60GB models)

2048 KB - Upper 308 KB is used for firmware (40/30/20GB models)

• Fast data transfer rate – up to 100 MB/s

• Media data transfer rate (max): 350 Mb/s

• Average seek time: 12 ms for read

• Closed-loop actuator servo (Embedded Sector Servo)

• Rotary voice coil motor actuator

• Load/Unload mechanism

• Mechanical latch

• Adaptive power save control - 0.65 Watts at idle state

• Power on to ready - 3.0 sec

• Operating shock: 1960 m/sec

2

(200 G) 2ms

• Nonoperating shock: 7840 m/sec

2

(800 G) 1ms

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

9

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

10

Part 1. Functional specification

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

11

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

12

3.0 Fixed-disk subsystem description

3.1 Control electronics

The control electronics works with the following functions:

• AT Interface Protocol

• Embedded Sector Servo

• No-ID (TM) formatting

• Multizone recording

• Code: 96/102 MTR

• ECC On-The-Fly

• Enhanced Adaptive Battery Life Extender

3.2 Head disk assembly data

The following technologies are used in the drive:

• Pico Slider

• Smooth glass disk

• GMR head

• Integrated lead suspension (ILS)

• Load/unload mechanism

• Mechanical latch

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

13

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

14

4.0 Drive characteristics

4.1 Formatted capacity

Table 1: Formatted capacities

80 GB model 60 GB model 40 GB model 30 GB model 20 GB model

Physical Layout

Bytes per sector

Sectors per track

Number of heads

Number of disks

Logical layout

512

392-952

4

2

512

392-952

3

2

512

392-952

2

1

512

392-952

2

1

512

392-952

1

1

Number of heads

Number of Sectors/track

Number of Cylinders

Number of sectors

16

63

16,383

156,301,488

16

63

16,383

117,210,240

16

63

16,383

78,140,160

16

63

16,383

58,605,120

16

63

16,383

39,070,080

Total logical data bytes 80,026,361,856 60,011,642,880 40,007,761,920 30,005,821,440 20,003,880,960

4.2 Data sheet

Table 2: Data sheet

Rotational Speed [RPM]

Data transfer rates (buffer to/from media) (Mbps)

Data transfer rates (Mbytes/sec) ULTRA DMA 100

Recording density (Kbit/mm) (Max)

(KBPI) (Max. Typ)

Track density (Ktrack/mm) (Typ.)

(Ktpi) (Typ)

Areal density (Kbit/sq-mm - Max)

(Gbit/sq-inch - Max)

Number of zones

4200

350

100

28

712

3.78

96

106

70

16

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

15

4.3 Cylinder allocation

The table shows typical data format (96K TPI / 712K BPI). Each drive is formatted in the factory test by optimizing TPI/BPI combination. Contact Hitachi technical support for detail.

Table 3: Cylinder allocation

Zone

Data Zone 0

Data Zone 1

Data Zone 2

Data Zone 3

Data Zone 4

Data Zone 5

Data Zone 6

Data Zone 7

Data Zone 8

Data Zone 9

Data Zone 10

Data Zone 11

Data Zone 12

Data Zone 13

Data Zone 14

Data Zone 15

96 kTPI / 712 kBPI format

Physical cylinders

0 - 4,359

4,360 - 9,591

9,592 - 13,951

13,952 - 19,183

19,184 - 23,775

23,980 - 28,775

28,776 - 33,135

33,136 - 37,059

37,060 - 39,675

39,676 - 43,163

43,164 - 48,395

48,396 - 51,011

51,012 - 53,627

53,628 - 54,935

54,936 - 57,551

57,552 - 58,859

Sectors/Track

525

504

483

462

448

630

609

588

546

868

840

812

777

735

700

672

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

16

4.4 Performance characteristics

Drive performance is characterized by the following parameters:

• Command overhead

• Mechanical head positioning

- Seek time

- Latency

• Data transfer speed

• Buffering operation (read ahead/write cache)

Note: All the above parameters contribute to drive performance. There are other parameters that contribute to the performance of the actual system. This specification tries to define the bare drive characteristics, not system throughput, which depends on the system and the application.

The following table gives a typical value for each parameter. The detailed descriptions are found in Section 5.0,

“Data integrity” beginning on page 21.

Table 4: Performance characteristics

Function

Average random seek time - read (ms)

Average random seek time - write (ms)

Rotational speed (RPM)

Power-on-to-ready (sec)

Command overhead (ms)

Disk-buffer data transfer (Mb/s)

Buffer-host data transfer (Mb/s)

12

14

4200

3.0

1.0

350

100

4.4.1 Command overhead

Command overhead time is defined as the interval from the time that a drive receives a command to the time that the actuator starts its motion

4.4.2 Mechanical positioning

4.4.2.1 Average seek time (including settling)

Table 5: Mechanical positioning performance

Command type

Read

Write

Typical (ms)

12

14

Max (ms)

16

17

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

17

“Typical” and “Max” are used throughout this document and are defined as follows:

Typical Average of the drive population tested at nominal environmental and voltage conditions.

Max Maximum value measured on any one drive over the full range of the environmental and voltage

conditions. (See Section 6.1, “Environment” on page 25 and Section 6.2, “DC power requirements” on page 27 for ranges.)

The seek time is measured from the start of the actuator’s motion to the start of a reliable read or write operation. A reliable read or write implies that error correction or recovery is not used to correct arrival problems. The average seek time is measured as the weighted average of all possible seek combinations.

max

Σ (m10 n)(Tnin + Tnout) n=1

Weighted Average = ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––

(max + 1)(max) where

max n

= Maximum seek length

= Seek length (1 to max)

Tnin = Inward measured seek time for an n track seek

Tnout = Outward measured seek time for an n track seek

4.4.2.2 Full stroke seek time

Table 6: Full stroke seek time

Command type

Read

Write

Typical (ms)

23.0

24.0

Max (ms)

30.0

31.0

Full stroke seek is measured as the average of 1,000 full stroke seeks.

4.4.2.3 Single track seek time (without command overhead, including settling)

Table 7: Single track seek time

Command type

Read

Write

Typical (ms)

2.5

3.0

Max (ms)

4.0

4.5

Single track seek is measured as the average of one (1) single track seek from every track in both directions

(inward and outward).

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

18

4.4.2.4 Average latency

Table 8: Average latency

Rotational speed

(RPM)

4200

Time for one revolution (ms)

14.3

Average latency

(ms)

7.1

4.4.2.5 Drive ready time

Table 9: Drive ready time

Condition

Power on to Ready

Drive ready time (sec)

Typical

3.0

Max

9.5

Ready

The condition in which the drive is able to perform a media access command (for example- read, write) immediately.

Power on to Ready This includes the time required for the internal self diagnostics.

4.4.3 Operating modes

4.4.3.1 Description of operating modes

Table 10: Description of operating modes

Operating mode

Spin-up

Description

Start up time period from spindle stop or power down.

Seek operation mode

Seek

Write Write operation mode

Read

Performance Idle

Active idle

Low power idle

Read operation mode

The device is capable of responding immediately to idle media access requests. All electronic components remain powered and the full frequency servo remains operational.

The device is capable of responding immediately to media access requests. Some circuitry—including servo system and R/W electronics—is in power saving mode. The head is parked near the mid-diameter the disk without servoing. A device in Active idle mode may take longer to complete the execution of a command because it must activate that circuitry.

The head is unloaded onto the ramp position. The spindle motor is rotating at full speed.

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

19

Table 10: Description of operating modes

Operating mode

Standby

Sleep

Description

The device interface is capable of accepting commands. The spindle motor is stopped.

All circuitry but the host interface is in power saving mode. The spindle motor is stopped. All circuitry but the host interface is in power saving mode.

The device requires a soft reset or a hard reset to be activated. All electronics, including spindle motor and host interface, are shut off.

4.4.3.2 Mode transition time - from Standby to Idle

Table 11: Drive ready time

From

Standby

To

Idle

Transition Time

(typical)

2.0 (80,60GB)

1.8(40,30,20GB)

Transition Time

(max.)

9.5

4.4.3.3 Operating mode at power on

The device goes into Idle mode after power on or hard reset as an initial state. Initial state may be changed to

Standby mode using pin C on the interface connector. Refer to section 7.10, “Drive address setting” on page 55 for

details.

4.4.3.4 Adaptive power save control

The transient timing from Performance Idle mode to Active Idle mode and Active Idle mode to Low Power Idle mode is controlled adaptively according to the access pattern of the host system. The transient timing from Low

Power Idle mode to Standby mode is also controlled adaptively, if it is allowed by Set Features Enable Adavanced

Power Management subcommand.

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

20

5.0 Data integrity

5.1 Data loss at power off

Data loss will not be caused by a power off during any operation except the write operation.

A power off during a write operation causes the loss of any received or resident data that has not been written onto the disk media.

A power off during a write operation might make a maximum of one sector of data unreadable. This state can be recovered by a rewrite operation.

5.2 Write Cache

When the write cache is enabled, the write command may complete before the actual disk write operation finishes. This means that a power off, even after the write command completion, could cause the loss of data that the drive has received but not yet written onto the disk.

In order to prevent this data loss, confirm the completion of the actual write operation prior to the power off by issuing a

• Soft reset

• Hard reset

• Flush Cache command

• Standby command

• Standby Immediate command

• Sleep command

Confirm the command's completion.

5.3 Equipment status

The equipment status is available to the host system whenever the drive is not ready to read, write, or seek.

This status normally exists at power-on time and will be maintained until the following conditions are satisfied:

• Access recalibration/tuning is complete

• Spindle speed meets requirements for reliable operations

• Self-check of drive is complete

Appropriate error status is made available to the host system if any of the following conditions occur after the drive has become ready:

• Spindle speed lies outside the requirements for reliable operation

• The occurrence of a Write Fault condition

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

21

5.4 WRITE safety

The drive ensures that the data is written into the disk media properly. The following conditions are monitored during a write operation. When one of these conditions exceeds the criteria, the write operation is terminated and the automatic retry sequence is invoked.

• Head off track

• External shock

• Low supply voltage

• Spindle speed out of tolerance

• Head open/short

5.5 Data buffer test

The data buffer is tested at power on reset and when a drive self-test is requested by the host. The test consists of a write/read '00'x and 'ff'x pattern on all buffers.

5.6 Error recovery

Errors occurring on the drive are handled by the error recovery procedure.

Errors that are uncorrectable after application of the error recovery procedures are reported to the host system as non-recoverable errors.

5.7 Automatic reallocation

The sectors that show some errors may be reallocated automatically when specific conditions are met. The drive does not report any auto reallocation to the host system. The conditions for auto reallocation are described below.

5.7.1 Nonrecovered write errors

When a write operation cannot be completed after the Error Recovery Procedure (ERP) is fully carried out, the sectors are reallocated to the spare location. An error is reported to the host system only when the write cache is disabled and the auto reallocation has failed.

5.7.2 Nonrecoverable read error

When a read operation fails after ERP is fully carried out, a hard error is reported to the host system. This location is registered internally as a candidate for the reallocation. When a registered location is specified as a target of a write operation, a sequence of media verification is performed automatically. When the result of this verification meets the required criteria, this sector is reallocated.

5.7.3 Recovered read errors

When a read operation for a sector fails and is recovered at the specific ERP step, the sector is reallocated automatically. A media verification sequence may be run prior to the reallocation according to the predefined conditions.

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

22

5.8 ECC

The 52 byte four way interleaved ECC processor provides user data verification and correction capability.

The first 4 bytes of ECC are check bytes for user data and the other 48 bytes are Read Solomon ECC. Each interleave has 12 bytes for ECC. Hardware logic corrects up to 20 bytes (5 bytes for each interleave) errors on-the-fly.

Following are some examples of error cases. An "O" means that the byte contains no error. An "X" means that at least one bit of the byte is bad.

Table 12: Examples of error cases.

On The Fly Correctable

Byte #

Interleave

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 Error byte# for each interleave

A B C D A B C D A B C D A B C D A B C D A B C D A B C D

Error pattern x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x 0 0 0 0

Error pattern x x x x x x x x x x x x 0 0 0 0 x x x x x x x x

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

Uncorrectable

Byte #

Interleave

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 Error byte# for each interleave

A B C D A B C D A B C D A B C D A B C D A B C D A B C D

Error pattern x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x 0 0 0

Error pattern x 0 0 0 x 0 0 0 x 0 0 0 x 0 0 0 x 0 0 0 x 0 0 0

6

6

5

0

5

0

5

0

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

23

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

24

6.0 Specification

6.1 Environment

6.1.1 Temperature and humidity

Table 13: Environmental condition

Operating conditions

Temperature

Relative humidity

Maximum wet bulb temperature

Maximum temperature gradient

Altitude

Non-operating conditions

Temperature

Relative humidity

Maximum wet bulb temperature

Maximum temperature gradient

Altitude

5 to 55ºC (See note below)

8 to 90%, non-condensing

29.4ºC, non-condensing

20ºC/hour

–300 to 3,048 m (10,000 ft)

–40 to 65ºC

5 to 95%, non-condensing

40ºC, non-condensing

20ºC/hour

–300 to 12,192 m (40,000 ft)

Notes:

The system is responsible for supplying sufficient ventilation to maintain a surface temperature below 60ºC at the center of the top cover of the drive and below 63°C at the center of the drive circuit board assembly.

The maximum storage period in the shipping package is one year.

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

25

Specification (Environment)

100

90

80

31'C/90%

41'C/95%

WetBulb 40'C

70

60

WetBulb29.4'C

Non Operating

50

40

Operating

65'C/23%

30

20

55'C/15%

10

0

-45 -35 -25 -15 -5 5 15 25 35 45 55 65

Temperature (degC)

Figure 1: Limits of temperature and humidity

6.1.1.1 Corrosion test

The drive must be functional and show no signs of corrosion after being exposed to a temperature humidity stress of 50°C/90% RH (relative humidity) for one week followed by a temperature and humidity drop to 25°C/40%RH in 2 hours.

6.1.2 Radiation noise

The drive shall work without degradation of the soft error rate under the following magnetic flux density limits at the enclosure surface.

Table 14: Magnetic flux density limits

Frequency (KHz) Limits (uT RMS)

0–60 500

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

26

Table 14: Magnetic flux density limits

Frequency (KHz) Limits (uT RMS)

61–100

101–200

201–400

250

100

50

6.1.3 Conductive noise

The disk drive shall work without soft error degradation in the frequency range from DC to 20 Mhz injected through any two of the mounting screw holes of the drive when an AC current of up to 45 mA (p-p) is applied through a 50-ohm resistor connected to any two mounting screw holes.

6.1.4 Magnetic fields

The disk drive will withstand radiation and conductive noise within the limits shown below. The test method is defined in the Noise Susceptibility Test Method specification, P/N 95F3944.

6.2 DC power requirements

Connection to the product should be made in a safety extra low voltage (SELV) circuits. The voltage specifications are applied at the power connector of the drive.

Table 15: DC power requirements

Item

Nominal supply

Supply voltage

Power supply ripple (0–20 MHz)

1

Tolerance

2

Supply rise time

Requirements

+5Volt DC

–0.3 Volt to 6.0 Volt

100mV p-p max.

±5%

7–100 ms

Watts (RMS typical)

Performance Idle average

3

Active Idle average

Low Power Idle average

Read average

4

Write average

Seek average

5

Standby

Sleep

Startup (max. peak)

6

80GB, 60GB models

1.85

0.95

0.65

2.1

2.2

2.3

0.25

0.1

4.7

40GB, 30GB 20GB models

1.85

0.85

0.65

2.0

2.1

2.3

0.25

0.1

4.7

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

27

Watts (RMS typical) 80GB, 60GB models

40GB, 30GB 20GB models

Average from power on to ready 3.3

3.3

Footnotes:

1

The maximum fixed disk ripple is measured at the 5 volt input of the drive.

2

The disk drive shall not incur damage for an over voltage condition of +25% (maximum duration of

20 ms) on the 5 volt nominal supply.

3

The idle current is specified at an inner track.

4

The read/write current is specified based on three operations of 63 sector read/write per 100 ms.

5

The seek average current is specified based on three operations per 100 ms.

6

The worst case operating current includes motor surge.

6.2.1 Power consumption efficiency

Table 16: Power consumption efficiency

Capacity

80GB

60GB

40GB

30GB

20GB

Power Consumption

Efficiency (Watts/GB)

0.008

0.011

0.016

0.022

0.033

Note: Power consumption efficiency is calculated as Power Consumption of Low Power Idle in Watts/Capacity

(GB).

6.3 Reliability

6.3.1 Data Reliability

• Probability of not recovering data is 1 in 10

13

bits read

• ECC implementation

On-the-fly correction performed as a part of read channel function recovers up to 20 symbols of error in one sector

(1 symbol is 8 bits).

6.3.2 Failure prediction (S.M.A.R.T.)

The drive supports Self-monitoring, analysis and reporting technology (S.M.A.R.T.) function. The details are

described in Section 11.8, “S.M.A.R.T. Function” on page 77 and Section 13.38, “S.M.A.R.T. Function Set (B0h)” on page 161.

6.3.3 Cable noise interference

To avoid any degradation of performance throughput or error when the interface cable is routed on top or comes in

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

28

common mode noise or voltage level difference between the system frame and power cable ground or AT interface cable ground should be in the allowable level specified in the power requirement section.

6.3.4 Service life and usage condition

The drive is designed to be used under the following conditions:

• The drive should be operated within specifications of shock, vibration, temperature, humidity, altitude, and magnetic field.

• The drive should be protected from ESD.

• The breathing hole in the top cover of the drive should not be covered.

• Force should not be applied to the cover of the drive.

• The specified power requirements of the drive should be satisfied.

• The drive frame should be grounded electrically to the system through four screws.

• The drive should be mounted with the recommended screw depth and torque.

• The interface physical and electrical requirements of the drive should satisfy ATA-6.

• The power-off sequence of the drive should comply with the required power off sequence described in Sec-

tion 6.3.6.2, “Required Power-Off Sequence” on page 30.

Service life of the drive is approximately 5 years or 20,000 power on hours, which comes first, under the following assumptions:

• Less than 333 power on hours per month.

• Seeking/Writing/Reading operation is less than 20% of power on hours.

This does not represent any warranty or warranty period. Applicable warranty and warranty period are covered by the purchase agreement.

6.3.5 Preventive maintenance

None

6.3.6 Load/unload

The product supports a minimum of 300,000 normal load/unloads.

Load/unload is a functional mechanism of the hard disk drive. It is controlled by the drive micro code. Specifically, unloading of the heads is invoked by the following commands:

• Hard reset

• Standby

• Standby immediate

• Sleep

Load/unload is also invoked as one of the idle modes of the drive.

The specified start/stop life of the product assumes that load/unload is operated normally, not in emergency mode.

6.3.6.1 Emergency unload

When hard disk drive power is interrupted while the heads are still loaded the micro code cannot operate and the normal 5-volt power is unavailable to unload the heads. In this case, normal unload is not possible. The heads are

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

29

unloaded by routing the back EMF of the spinning motor to the voice coil. The actuator velocity is greater than the normal case and the unload process is inherently less controllable without a normal seek current profile.

Emergency unload is intended to be invoked in rare situations. Because this operation is inherently uncontrolled, it is more mechanically stressful than a normal unload.

The drive supports a minimum of 20,000 emergency unloads.

6.3.6.2 Required Power-Off Sequence

The required BIOS sequence for removing power from the drive is as follows:

Step 1: Issue one of the following command:

• Standby

• Standby immediate

• Sleep

Note: Do not use the Flush Cache command for the power off sequence because this command does not invoke

Unload.

Step 2: Wait until the Command Complete status is returned

In a typical case 350 ms are required for the command to finish completion; however, the BIOS time out value

needs to be 30 seconds considering error recovery time. Refer to Section 14.0, “Time-out values” on page 193.

Step 3: Terminate power to the drive

This power-down sequence should be followed for entry into any system power-down state, system suspend state, or system hibernation state. In a robustly designed system, emergency unload is limited to rare scenarios, such as battery removal during operation.

6.3.6.3 Power Switch design considerations

In systems that use this drive consideration should be given to the design of the system power switch.

Hitachi recommends that the switch operate under control of the BIOS rather than be hardwired. The same recommendation is made for cover-close switches. When a hardwired switch is turned off, emergency unload occurs, as

well as the problems cited in Section 5.1, “Data loss at power off” on page 21 and Section 5.2, “Write Cache” on page 21.

6.3.6.4 Test considerations

Start/stop testing is classically performed to verify head/disk durability. The heads do not land on the disk, therefore this type of test should be viewed as a test of the load/unload function.

Start/Stop testing should be done by commands through the interface, not by power cycling the drive. Simple power cycling of the drive invokes the emergency unload mechanism and subjects the HDD to nontypical mechanical stress.

Power cycling testing may be required to test the boot-up function of the system. In this case Hitachi recommends

that the power-off portion of the cycle contain the sequence specified in Section 6.3.6.2, “Required Power-Off

Sequence” on page 30. If this is not done, the emergency unload function is invoked and nontypical stress results.

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

30

6.4 Mechanical specifications

6.4.1 Physical dimensions and weight

The following table lists the dimensions of the drive.

Table 17: Physical dimensions and weight

Height [mm]

Width [mm]

Length [mm]

Weight [grams - maximum]

80GB, 60GB 40GB, 30GB, 20GB

9.5±0.2

9.5±0.2

69.85±0.25

100.2±0.25

102 Max

69.85±0.25

100.2±0.25

95 Max

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

31

6.4.2 Mounting hole locations

The mounting hole locations and size of the drive are shown below.

Figure 2: Mounting hole locations

6.4.3 Connector and jumper description

A jumper is used to designate the drive address as either master or slave. The jumper setting method is described in

Section 7.10, “Drive address setting” on page 55.

Connector specifications are included in Section 7.2, “Interface connector” on page 39.

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

32

6.4.4 Mounting orientation

The drive will operate in all axes (six directions) and will stay within the specified error rates when tilted ±5degrees from these positions.

Performance and error rate will stay within specification limits if the drive is operated in the other permissible orientations from which it was formatted. Thus a drive formatted in a horizontal orientation will be able to run vertically and vice versa.

The recommended mounting screw torque is 3.0±0.5 kgf-cm.

The recommended mounting screw depth is 3.0±0.3 mm for bottom and 3.5±0.5 mm for horizontal mounting.

The user is responsible for using the appropriate screws or equivalent mounting hardware to mount the drive securely enough to prevent excessive motion or vibration of the drive at seek operation or spindle rotation.

6.4.5 Load/unload mechanism

The head load/unload mechanism is provided to protect the disk data during shipping, movement, or storage. Upon

power down, a head unload mechanism secures the heads at the unload position. See Section 6.5.4, “Nonoperating shock” on page 35 for additional details.

6.5 Vibration and shock

All vibration and shock measurements in this section are for drives without mounting attachments for systems. The input level shall be applied to the normal drive mounting points.Vibration tests and shock tests are to be conducted by mounting the drive to a table using the bottom four mounting holes.

6.5.1 Operating vibration

The drive will operate without a hard error while being subjected to the following vibration levels.

6.5.1.1 Random vibration

The test consists of 30 minutes of random vibration using the power spectral density (PSD) levels below. The vibration test level is 6.57 m/sec

2

RMS (Root Mean Square) (0.67 G RMS).

Table 18: Random vibration PSD profile breakpoints (operating)

Random vibration PSD profile breakpoint

Hz

5

17

45

48

62

65

150

200

500

(m 2/sec 4)/Hz

1.9 x 10-3

1.1 x 10-1

1.1 x 10-1

7.7 x 10-1

7.7 x 10-1

9.6 x 10-2

9.6 x 10-2

4.8x 10-2

4.8 x 10-2

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

33

6.5.1.2 Swept sine vibration

Table 19: Swept sine vibration

Swept sine vibration

(zero to peak 5 to 500 to 5 Hz sine wave)

9.8 m/sec

2

(1 G) (5-500 Hz)

Sweep rate (oct/min)

2.0

6.5.2 Nonoperating vibration

The disk drive withstands the vibration levels described below without any loss or permanent damage.

6.5.2.1 Random vibration

The test consists of a random vibration applied in each of three mutually perpendicular axes for a duration of

15 minutes per axis. The PSD levels for the test simulating the shipping and relocation environment is shown below.

Table 20: Random Vibration PSD Profile Breakpoints (nonoperating)

Hz

2.5

5

40

500

(m2/sec4)/Hz

0.096

2.88

1.73

1.73

Note: Overall RMS (root mean square) level of vibration is 3.01 G rms.

6.5.2.2 Swept sine vibration

• 49 m/sec

2

(5 G) (zero-to-peak), 5 to 500 to 10 Hz sine wave

• 0.5 oct/min sweep rate

• 25.4 mm (peak-to-peak) displacement, 5 to 10 to 5 Hz

6.5.3 Operating shock

The hard disk drive meets the criteria in the table below while operating under these conditions:

• The shock test consists of 10 shock inputs in each axis and direction for a total of 60.

• There must be a minimum delay of 3 seconds between shock pulses.

• The disk drive will operate without a hard error while subjected to the following half-sine shock pulse

Table 21: Operating shock

Duration of 2 ms

1960 m/sec

2

(200 G)

Duration of 11 ms

147 m/sec

2

(15 G)

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

34

The input level shall be applied to the normal disk drive subsystem mounting points used to secure the drive in a normal system.

6.5.4 Nonoperating shock

The drive withstands the following half-sine shock pulse without any data loss or permanent damage.

Table 22: Nonoperating shock

Duration of 1 ms Duration of 11 ms

7840 m/sec2 (800 G) 1176 m/sec2 (120 G)

The shocks are applied for each direction of the drive for three mutually perpendicular axes, one axis at a time.

Input levels are measured on a base plate where the drive is attached with four screws

6.6 Acoustics

6.6.1 Sound power levels

The criteria of A-weighted sound power level are described below.

Measurements are to be taken in accordance with ISO 7779. The mean of the sample of 40 drives is to be less than the typical value. Each drive is to be less than the maximum value. The drives are to meet this requirement in both board down orientations.

Table 23: Weighted sound power

40GB, 30GB, 20GB models

80GB, 60GB models

Idle

Operating

Idle

Operating

A-weighted sound power

Typical (Bels)

2.0

2.4

2.3

2.7

Maximum (Bels)

2.3

2.6

2.6

2.9

The background power levels of the acoustic test chamber for each octave band are to be recorded.

Sound power tests are to be conducted with the drive supported by spacers so that the lower surface of the drive be located 25±3 mm above from the chamber floor. No sound absorbing material shall be used.

The acoustical characteristics of the disk drive are measured under the following conditions:

Mode definitions

Idle mode: Power on, disks spinning, track following, unit ready to receive and respond to control line commands.

Operating mode: Continuous random cylinder selection and seek operation of the actuator with a dwell time at each cylinder. The seek rate for the drive is calculated with the following formula:

Ns= 0.4/(Tt + T1) where:

Ns = average seek rate in seeks/s

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

35

Tt = published seek time from one random track to another without including rotational latency

T1= equivalent time in seconds for the drive to rotate by half a revolution

6.6.2 Discrete tone penalty

Discrete tone penalties are added to the A-weighted sound power (Lw) with the following formula only when determining compliance.

Lwt(spec) = Lw = 0.1Pt + 0.3 < 4.0 (Bels) where

Lw = A-weighted sound power level

Pt = Value of desecrate tone penalty = dLt – 6.0(dBA) dLt = Tone-to-noise ratio taken in accordance with ISO 7779 at each octave band

6.7 Identification labels

The following labels are affixed to every drive:

• A label which is placed on the top of the head disk assembly containing the statement "Made by Hitachi" or equivalent, part number, EC number, and FRU number.

• A bar code label which is placed on the disk drive based on user request. The location on the disk drive is to be designated in the drawing provided by the user.

• Labels containing the vendor's name, disk drive model number, serial number, place of manufacture, and UL/

CSA logos.

• Labels containing jumper information if required by the customer.

6.8 Electromagnetic compatibility

When installed in a suitable enclosure and exercised with a random accessing routine at maximum data rate meets the worldwide EMC requirements listed below:

• United States Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and Regulations (Class B), Part 15

• RFI Japan VCCI, Requirements of IBM products

• EU EMC Directive, Technical Requirements and Conformity Assessment Procedures

6.8.1 CE mark

The product is certified for compliance with EC directive 89/336/EEC. The EC marking for the certification appears on the drive.

6.8.2 C-TICK mark

The drive complies with the Australian EMC standard "Limits and methods of measurement of radio disturbance characteristics of information technology equipment, AS/NZS 3548:1995 Class B."

6.8.3 BSMI mark

The product complies with the Taiwan EMC standard"Limits and methods of measurement of radio disturbance characteristics of information technology equipment, CNS 13438 Class B."

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

36

6.8.4 MIC mark

The product complies with the Korea EMC standard. The regulation for certification of information and communication equipment is based on "Telecommunications Basic Act" and "Radio Waves Act." Korea EMC requirment are based technically on CISPR22:1993-12 measurement standards and limits. MIC standards are likewise based on IEC standards.

6.9 Safety

The following shows the safety standards for different countries.

6.9.1 UL and CSA approval

The product is qualified per UL (Underwriters Laboratory) 1950 Third Edition and CAN/CSA C22.2 No.950-M95

Third Edition, for use in Information Technology Equipment, including Electric Business Equipment. The UL Recognition or the CSA certification is maintained for the product life. The UL and C-UL recognition mark or the CSA monogram for CSA certification appears on the drive.

6.9.2 IEC compliance

All models of the Travelstar 80GN comply with IEC 950:1991 +A1-4.

6.9.3 German safety mark

All models of the Travelstar 80GN are approved by TUV on Test Requirement: EN60950:1992+A1-4, but the GS mark has not been obtained.

6.9.4 Flammability

The printed circuit boards used in this drive are made of material with a UL recognized flammability rating of V-1 or better. The flammability rating is marked or etched on the board. All other parts not considered electrical components are made of material with a UL recognized flammability rating of V-1 or better. However, small mechanical parts such as cable ties, washers, screws, and PC board mounts may be made of material with a UL recognized flammability rating of V-2.

6.9.5 Secondary circuit protection

This product utilizes printed circuit wiring that must be protected against the possibility of sustained combustion due to circuit or component failures as defined in C-B 2-4700-034 (Protection Against Combustion). Adequate secondary over current protection is the responsibility of the using system.

The user must protect the drive from its electrical short circuit problem. A 10 amp limit is required for safety purposes.

6.10 Packaging

Drives are packed in ESD protective bags and shipped in appropriate containers.

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

37

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

38

7.0 Electrical interface specification

7.1 Cabling

The maximum cable length from the host system to the hard disk drive plus circuit pattern length in the host system shall not exceed 18 inches.

7.2 Interface connector

The signal connector for AT attachment is designed to mate with Dupont part number 69764-044 or equivalent.

The figure below and Figure 2: “Mounting hole locations” on page 32 show the connector and pin location.

43

Pin

19 1

C A

44 22

Pin

2 D B

Figure 1: Interface connector pin assignments

Pin position 20 is left blank for correct connector insertion.

Pin positions A, B, C, and D are used for the drive address setting. (Refer to Figure 3: “Drive address setting” on page 55 for correct address setting.)

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

39

7.3 Signal definitions

The pin assignments of interface signals are listed as follows:Signal definitions

Table 24: Signal definitions

PIN

23

25

27

29

15

17

19

21

07

09

11

13

01

03

05

39

41

43

31

33

35

37

SIGNAL

RESET-

DD07

DD06

DD05

DD04

DD03

DD02

DD01

DD00

GND

DMARQ

DIOW-(*)

DIOR-(*)

IORDY(*)

DMACK-

INTRQ

DA01

DA00

CS0-

DASP-

+ 5V logic

GND

O

I

O

I

O

I

I

I

I

I/O power

I/O

I

I/O

I/O

I/O

I/O

I/O

I/O

I/O

I/O

3–state

TTL

TTL

3–state

TTL

3–state

TTL

TTL

TTL

OD

Type

TTL

3–state

3–state

3–state

3–state

3–state

3–state

3–state

3–state

PIN

24

26

28

30

16

18

(20)

22

08

10

12

14

02

04

06

40

42

44

32

34

36

38

SIGNAL I/O

DD14

DD15

Key

GND

GND

GND

CSEL

GND

GND

DD08

DD09

DD10

DD11

DD12

DD13

I

(reserved)

PDIAG-

DA02

CS1-

I/O

I

I

GND

+ 5V motor power

(reserved)

I/O

I/O

I/O

I/O

I/O

I/O

I/O

I/O

Type

3–state

3–state

3–state

3–state

3–state

3–state

3–state

3–state

TTL

OD

TTL

TTL

I

O

I/O

OD power reserved designates an output from the drive designates an input to the drive designates an input/output common designates an Open-Drain output designates a power supply to the drive designates reserved pins which must be left unconnected

The signal lines marked with (*) are redefined during the Ultra DMA protocol to provide special functions. These lines change from the conventional to special definitions at the moment the host decides to allow a DMA burst, if the Ultra DMA transfer mode was previously chosen via SetFeatures. The drive becomes aware of this change upon assertion of the DMACK line. These lines revert back to their original definitions upon the deassertion of

DMACK- at the termination of the DMA burst.

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

40

Table 25: Special signal definitions for Ultra DMA

Write Operation

Read Operation

Special Definition

(for Ultra DMA)

DDMARDY-

HSTROBE

STOP

HDMARDY-

DSTROBE

STOP

Conventional

Definition

IORDY

DIOR-

DIOW-

DIOR-

IORDY

DIOW-

7.4 Signal descriptions

DD00–DD15

A 16-bit bi-directional data bus between the host and the drive. The lower 8 lines, DD00-07, are used for Register and ECC access. All 16 lines, DD00–15, are used for data transfer. These are 3-state lines with 16mA current sink capability.

DA00–DA02

These are addresses used to select the individual register in the drive.

CS0-

The chip select signal generated from the Host address bus. When active, one of the Command Block Registers

[Data, Error (Features when written), Sector Count, Sector Number, Cylinder Low, Cylinder High, Drive/Head and Status (Command when written) register] can be selected.

CS1-

The chip select signal generated from the Host address bus. When active, one of the Control Block Registers

[Alternate Status (Device Control when written) and Drive Address register] can be selected.

RESET-

This line is used to reset the drive. It shall be kept at a Low logic state during power up and kept High thereafter.

DIOW-

The rising edge of this signal holds data from the data bus to a register or data register of the drive.

DIOR-

When this signal is low, it enables data from a register or data register of the drive onto the data bus. The data on the bus shall be latched on the rising edge of DIOR-

INTRQ

The interrupt is enabled only when the drive is selected and the host activates the IEN- bit in the Device Control

Register. Otherwise, this signal is in high impedance state regardless of the state of the IRQ bit. The interrupt is set when the IRQ bit is set by the drive CPU. The IRQ is reset to zero by a host read of the status register or a write to the Command Register. This signal is a 3-state line with 16mA of sink capability.

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

41

DASP-

This is a time-multiplexed signal which indicates that a drive is active or that device 1 is present. This signal is driven by an Open-Drain driver and internally pulled up to 5.0 volts through a 10 k. resistor. During a Power-

On initialization or after RESET- is negated, DASP- shall be asserted by device 1 within 400 ms to indicate that device 1 is present. Device 0 shall allow up to 450 ms for device 1 to assert DASP-. If device 1 is not present, device 0 may assert DASP- to drive an LED indicator on a host. The DASP- signal shall be negated following acceptance of the first valid command by device 1. Anytime after negation of DASP-, either drive may assert DASP- to indicate that a drive is active.

Caution

The host doesshall not drive DASP-. If the host connects to DASP- for any purpose, the host shall ensure that the signal level detected on the interface for DASP- shall maintain VoH and VoL compatibility, given the IoH and IoL requirements of the DASP- device drivers.

Caution

When DASP- is negated, the line is in a high impedance state. The signal level may look less than 5.0V even though the line is pulled up to 5.0V through a resistor."

PDIAG-

This signal shall be asserted by device 1 to indicate to device 0 that it has completed the diagnostics. This line is pulled up to 3.3 volts in the drive through a 10 kW resistor.

Following a Power On Reset, software reset, or RESET-, drive 1 shall negate PDIAG- within 1 ms (to indicate to device 0 that it is busy). Drive 1 shall then assert PDIAG- within 30 seconds to indicate that it is no longer busy and is able to provide status.

Following the receipt of a valid Execute Drive Diagnostics command, device 1 shall negate PDIAG- within 1 ms to indicate to device 0 that it is busy and has not yet passed its drive diagnostics. If device 1 is present then device 0 shall wait up to 6 seconds from the receipt of a valid Execute Drive Diagnostics command for drive 1 to assert PDIAG-. Device 1 should clear BSY before asserting PDIAG-, as PDIAG- is used to indicate that device 1 has passed its diagnostics and is ready to post status. If DASP- was not asserted by device 1 during reset initialization, device 0 shall post its own status immediately after it completes diagnostics and clears the device 1 Status register to 00h. Device 0 may be unable to accept commands until it has finished its reset procedure and is ready (DRDY=1).

CSEL (Cable Select)

This signal is monitored to determine the drive address (master or slave) when the jumper on the interface connector is at Position-3.

When CSEL is at ground or is at a low level, the drive works as a Master. If CSEL is open or is at a logical high level, the drive works as a Slave.

The signal level of CSEL to one drive should be different from the signal level to another drive on the same AT interface cable to avoid master-master or slave-slave configurations.

KEY

Pin position 20 has no connection pin. It is recommended to close the respective position of the cable connector in order to avoid incorrect insertion.

IORDY

This signal is an indication to the host that the drive is ready to complete the current I/O cycle. This line is driven low at the falling edge of DIOR- or DIOW- when the drive needs some additional WAIT cycle(s) to

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

42

extend the PIO cycle. This line can be connected to the host IORDY signal in order to insert a WAIT state(s) into the host PIO cycle. This signal is an Open-Drain output with 16mA sink capability.

5V Power

There are two input pins for the +5 V power supply. One is the "+5 V Logic" input pin and the second is the "+5

V Motor" input pin. These two input pins are tied together within the drive.

DMACK-

This signal shall be used by the host in response to DMARQ to either acknowledge that data has been accepted, or that data is available.

This signal is internally pulled up to 5 Volt through a 15kW resistor with a resistor tolerance value of –50% to

+100%.

DMARQ

This signal is used for DMA data transfers between the host and drive. It shall be asserted by the drive when it is ready to transfer data to or from the host. The direction of data transfer is controlled by HIOR- and HIOW- signals. This signal is used in a handshake mode with DMACK-. This signal is a 3-state line with 16mA sink capability and internally pulled down to GND through a 10 kW resistor.

HDMARDY- (Ultra DMA)

This signal is used only for Ultra DMA data transfers between host and drive. The signal HDMARDY- is a flow control signal for Ultra DMA data in bursts. This signal is held asserted by the host to indicate to the device that the host is ready to receive Ultra DMA data in transfers. The host may negate HDMARDY- to pause an Ultra

DMA data in transfer.

HSTROBE (Ultra DMA)

This signal is used only for Ultra DMA data transfers between host and drive.

The signal HSTROBE is the data out strobe signal from the host for an Ultra DMA data out transfer. Both the rising and falling edge of HSTROBE latch the data from DD (15:0) into the device. The host may stop toggling

HSTROBE to pause an Ultra DMA data out transfer.

STOP (Ultra DMA)

This signal is used only for Ultra DMA data transfers between host and drive.

The STOP signal shall be asserted by the host prior to initiation of an Ultra DMA burst. A STOP shall be negated by the host before data is transferred in an Ultra DMA burst. Assertion of STOP by the host during or after data transfer in an Ultra DMA mode signals the termination of the burst.

DDMARDY- (Ultra DMA)

This signal is used only for Ultra DMA data transfers between host and drive.

The signal DDMARDY- is a flow control signal for Ultra DMA data out bursts. This signal is held asserted by the device to indicate to the host that the device is ready to receive Ultra DMA data out transfers. The device may negate DDMARDY- to pause an Ultra DMA data out transfer.

DSTROBE (Ultra DMA)

This signal is used only for Ultra DMA data transfers between host and drive.

The signal DSTROBE is the data in strobe signal from the device for an Ultra DMA data in transfer. Both the rising and the falling edge of DSTROBE latch the data from DD (15:0) into the host. The device may stop toggling DSTROBE to pause an Ultra DMA data in transfer.

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

43

7.5 Interface logic signal levels

The interface logic signals have the following electrical specifications:

Inputs

Outputs:

Current

Voltage input high (ViH)

Voltage input low (ViL)

Voltage output high at

IoH min (VoH)

Voltage output low at

IoL min (VoL)

Driver Sink Current

(IoL)

Driver Source Current

(IoH)

2.0 V min./5.5 V max.

–0.5 V min./0.8 V max.

2.4 V min.

0.5 V max.

16 mA min.

400

µA min.

7.6 Reset timings

RESET– t10

BUSY t1 t1 t10

PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

RESET– high to Not BUSY

RESET– low width

Figure 2: System reset timings

Min (

µs)

25

Max (

µs)

9.5

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

44

7.7 PIO timings

The PIO cycle timings meet Mode 4 of the ATA/ATAPI-6 description.

C S (1 :0 )-

D A (2 :0 ) t1 t0

D IO R -,

D IO W -

W rite d a ta

D D (1 5 :0 )

R e a d d a ta

D D (1 5 :0 ) t2 t3 t5 t7 (*) t4 t9 t6 t6 z t2 i t8 (*)

IO R D Y tA tB

Table 26: PIO cycle timings t0 t1 t2 t2i t3 t4 t5 t6 t6z t9 tRD tA tB

PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Cycle time

Address valid to DIOR-/DIOW- setup

DIOR-/DIOW- pulse width

DIOR-/DIOW- recovery time

DIOW- data setup

DIOW- data hold

DIOR- data setup

DIOR- data hold

DIOR- data tristate

DIOR-/DIOW- to address valid hold

Read data valid to IORDY active

IORDY setup width

IORDY pulse width

MIN (ns)

20

10

20

5

120

25

70

25

10

0

MAX (ns)

30

35

1,250

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

45

7.8 Multi word DMA timings

The Multi word DMA timings meet Mode 2 of the ATA/ATAPI-6 description.

DMARQ tLR/tLW

DMACKt0 tI tD tKR/tKW tJ

DIOR-/DIOWtE tG tF tZ

READ DD(15:0) tG tH

WRITE DD(15:0)

Table 27: Multiword DMA cycle timings t0 tD tE tF tG tH tI tJ

PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Cycle time

DIOR-/DIOW- asserted pulse width

DIOR- data access

DIOR- data hold

DIOR-/DIOW- data setup

DIOW- data hold

DMACK- to DIOR-/DIOW- setup

DIOR-/DIOW- to DMACK- hold tKR/tKW DIOR- negated pulse width / DIOW- negated pulse width tLR/tLW DIOR- to DMARQ delay / DIOW- to DMARQ delay tZ DMACK- to read data released

MIN (ns) MAX (ns)

120 –

70

50

5

20

10

0

5

25

35

25

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

46

7.9 Ultra DMA timings

The Ultra DMA timings meet Mode 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 of the Ultra DMA Protocol.

7.9.1 Initiating Read DMA

DMARQ tUI

DMACKtACK tENV

STOP

HDMARDY-

DSTROBE

DD(15:0) tACK tENV tZIORDY tFS tCYC t2CYC tCYC tAZ xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx

Host drives DD tZAD tDS tDH xxx RD Data xxxx RD Data xxx RD Data

Device drives DD

Table 28: Ultra DMA cycle timings (Initiating Read)

PARAMETER

DESCRIPTION tUI tACK tENV

Unlimited interlock time

Setup time for DMACK-

Envelope time tZIORDY Minimum time before driving IORDY tFS tCYC t2CYC tAZ

First DSTROBE time

Cycle time

Two cycle time

Maximum time allowed for output drivers to release

Drivers to assert tZAD tDS tDH

Data setup time at host

Data hold time at host

MODE 0

MIN

(ns)

0

MAX

(ns)

20

20

0

70

MODE 1

MIN

(ns)

0

MAX

(ns)

20

20

0

70

MODE 2

MIN

(ns)

0

MAX

(ns)

20

20

0

70

MODE 3

MIN

(ns)

0

MAX

(ns)

20

20

0

55

MODE 4

MIN

(ns)

0

MAX

(ns)

MODE 5

MIN

(ns)

0

MAX

(ns)

20

20

0

55

20

20

0

50

0

112

230

0

15

5

230

10

0

73

154

0

10

5

200

10

0

7

5

0

54

115

170

10

0

7

5

0

39

86

130

10

0

5

5

0

25

57

120

10

0

16.8

38

0

4

4.6

90

10

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

47

7.9.2 Host Pausing Read DMA

DMARQ

DMACK-

STOP tSR

HDMARDY-

DSTROBE

Table 29: Ultra DMA cycle timings (Host Pausing Read) tRFS

PARAMETER

DESCRIPTION tSR tRFS

DSTROBE to

HDMARDY- time

HDMARDY- to final

DSTROBE time

MODE 0

MIN

(ns)

MAX

(ns)

MODE 1

MIN

(ns)

MAX

(ns)

MODE 2

MIN

(ns)

MAX

(ns)

MODE 3

MIN

(ns)

MAX

(ns)

MODE 4

MIN

(ns)

MAX

(ns)

MODE 5

MIN

(ns)

MAX

(ns)

– 50 – 30 – 20 – – – – – –

– 75 – 70 – 60 – 60 – 60 – 50

Note: When a host does not satisfy the tSR timing, the host should be ready to receive two more data words after

HDMARDY - is negated.

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

48

7.9.3 Host Terminating Read DMA

DMARQ tLI tMLI

DMACKtRP tACK

STOP tACK

HDMARDY-

DSTROBE

DD(15:0) tRFS tLI tIORDYZ xxx RD Data tAZ xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxx tCS tCH

CRC xxxxxxxxxxx tZAH

Device drives DD Host drives DD

Table 30: Ultra DMA cycle timings (Host Terminating Read)

PARAMETER

DESCRIPTION

MODE 0 MODE 1 MODE 2 MODE 3 MODE 4 MODE 5

MIN

(ns)

MAX

(ns)

MIN

(ns)

MAX

(ns)

MIN

(ns)

MAX

(ns)

MIN

(ns)

MAX

(ns)

MIN

(ns)

MAX

(ns)

MIN

(ns)

MAX

(ns) tRFS HDMARDY- to final DSTROBE time

Ready to pause time tRP tLI tAZ tZAH

Limited interlock time

Maximum time allowed for output drivers to release

Minimum delay time required for output

Interlock time with minimum tMLI tCS tCH

CRC word setup time at device

CRC word hold time at device tACK Hold time for DMACKtIORDYZ Maximum time before releasing

IORDY

160 –

0 150

20

20

15

5

20

75

10

20

125 – 100 –

0 150 0 150

100

0

100

100

0

100

85

0

20

20

10

5

20

70

10

20

20

20

7

5

20

60

10

20

20

20

7

5

20

60

10

20

20

20

5

5

20

60

10

20

20

20

4

4.6

20

50

75

10

20

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

49

7.9.4 Device Terminating Read DMA

DMARQ tSS tMLI

DMACKtLI tACK

STOP tLI tACK

HDMARDYtLI tIORDYZ

DSTROBE

DD(15:0) xxxxxx tAZ xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx tCH tCS

CRC xxxxxxxxxx tZAH

Device drives DD

Host drives DD

Table 31: Ultra DMA cycle timings (Device Terminating Read)

PARAMETER

DESCRIPTION

MODE 0 MODE 1 MODE 2 MODE 3 MODE 4 MODE 5

MIN

(ns)

MAX

(ns)

MIN

(ns)

MAX

(ns)

MIN

(ns)

MAX

(ns)

MIN

(ns)

MAX

(ns)

MIN

(ns)

MAX

(ns)

MIN

(ns)

MAX

(ns) tSS tLI tAZ tZAH

Time from DSTROBE edge to negation of DMARQ

Limited interlock time

Maximum time allowed for output drivers to release

Maximum delay time required for output tMLI tCS tCH tACK

Interlock time with minimum

CRC word setup time at device

CRC word hold time at device

Hold time for DMACKtIORDYZ Maximum time before releasing

IORDY

50

0 150

20

20

15

5

20

10

20

50 –

0 150

20

20

10

5

20

10

20

50

0 150

20

20

7

5

20

10

20

50

0 100

20

20

7

5

20

10

20

50 –

0 100

20

20

5

5

20

10

20

50

0

20

20

4

4.6

75

10

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

50

7.9.5 Initiating Write DMA

DMARQ tUI

DMACKtACK tENV

STOP tLI tZIORDY

DDMARDYtCYC t2CYC tCYC tACK tUI

HSTROBE

DD(15:0) xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx WT Data xxx tDS tDH

WT Data xxx WT Data

Host drives DD

Table 32: Ultra DMA cycle timing (Initiating Write)

PARAMETER DESCRIPTION tUI tACK tENV

Unlimited interlock time

Setup time for DMACK-

Envelope time tZIORDY Minimum time before driving

IORDY tLI tCYC t2CYC tDS tDH

Limited interlock time

Cycle time

Two cycle time

Data setup time at device

Data Hold time at device

MODE 0 MODE 1 MODE 2 MODE 3 MODE 4 MODE 5

MIN

(ns)

0

MAX

(ns)

MIN

(ns)

– 0

MAX

(ns)

MIN

(ns)

– 0

MAX

(ns)

MIN

(ns)

MAX

(ns)

MIN

(ns)

MAX

(ns)

MIN

(ns)

MAX

(ns)

– 0 – 0 – 0 –

20

20

0

70

20

20

0

70

20

20

0

70

20

20

0

55

20

20

0

55

20

20

0

55

0 150

112 –

230

15

5

0

73

154

10

5

150

0 150

54 –

115

7

5

0 100

39 –

86

7

5

0 100

25 –

0

16.8

75

57

5

5

38

4

4.6

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

51

7.9.6 Device Pausing Write DMA

DMARQ

DMACK-

STOP tSR

DDMARDYtRFS

HSTROBE

Table 33: Ultra DMA cycle timing (Device Pausing Write) tSR tRFS

PARAMETER

DESCRIPTION

HSTROBE to DDMARDY- time

DDMARDY- to final HSTROBE time

MODE 0

MIN

(ns)

MAX

(ns)

MIN

(ns)

MAX

(ns)

MIN

(ns)

MAX

(ns)

MIN

(ns)

MAX

(ns)

MIN

(ns)

MAX

(ns)

MIN

(ns)

MAX

(ns)

50

75

MODE 1

30

70

MODE 2

20

60

MODE 3

60

MODE 4

60

MODE 5

50

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

52

7.9.7 Device Terminating Write DMA

DMARQ tRP tLI tMLI

DMACKtACK

STOP tIORDYZ

DDMARDY-

HSTROBE tRFS tLI tACK xxx WT Data xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx tCS tCH

CRC xxxxxxxxxx DD(15:0)

Host drives DD

Table 34: Ultra DMA cycle timings (Device TerminatingWrite)

PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

MODE 0 MODE 1 MODE 2 MODE 3 MODE 4 MODE 5

MIN

(ns)

MAX

(ns)

MIN

(ns)

MAX

(ns)

MIN

(ns)

MAX

(ns)

MIN

(ns)

MAX

(ns)

MIN

(ns)

MAX

(ns)

MIN

(ns)

MAX

(ns) tRFS DDMARDY- to final HSTROBE time

Ready to pause time tRP tLI tMLI tCS tCH

Limited interlock time

Interlocking time with minimum

CRC word setup time at device

CRC word hold time at device tACK Hold time for DMACK-negation tIORDYZ Maximum time before releasing

IORDY

– 75 – 70 – 60 – 60 – 60

160 – 125

0 150

20 –

0

20

150

100

0

20

150

100

0

20

100

100

0

20

100

15

5

20

10

5

20

7

5

20

7

5

20

5

5

20

– 20 – 20 – 20 – 20 – 20

4

4.6

20

85

0

20

50

20

75

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

53

7.9.8 Host Terminating Write DMA

DMARQ tLI tMLI

DMACKtSS tACK

STOP tLI tIORDYZ

DDMARDYtLI tACK

HSTROBE xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx tCS tCH

CRC xxxxxxxxxx DD(15:0)

Host drives DD

Table 35: Ultra DMA cycle timings (Host Terminating Write)

PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

MODE 0 MODE 1 MODE 2 MODE 3 MODE 4 MODE 5

MIN

(ns)

MAX

(ns)

MIN

(ns)

MAX

(ns)

MIN

(ns)

MAX

(ns)

MIN

(ns)

MAX

(ns)

MIN

(ns)

MAX

(ns)

MIN

(ns)

MAX

(ns) tSS tLI tMLI tCS

Time from HSTROBE edge to assertion of STOP

Limited interlock time

Interlock time with minimum

CRC word setup time at device tCH tACK

CRC word hold time at device

Hold time for DMACKtIORDYZ Maximum time before releasing

IORDY

50

0 150

20

15

5

20

20

50 –

0 150

20

10

5

20

– 20

50

0 150

20

7

5

20

20

50

0 100

20

7

5

20

20

50 –

0 100

20

5

5

20

– 20

50

0

20

4

4.6

20

20

75

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

54

7.10 Drive address setting

A jumper placed on the interface connector determines the drive address. Three drive addresses are shown below.

Two addresses require the setting of a jumper.

3 1

1 2 3 4

4 2

5

Figure 3: Drive address setting

Setting 1—Device 0 (Master) (no jumper is used)

Setting 2—Device 1 (Slave)

Setting 3—Cable Select

Setting 4—Do not attach a jumper here

Setting 5—Do not attach a jumper here

The default setting at shipment is Setting 1 (no jumper).

When pin C is grounded, the drive does not spin up at POR.

When the drive address is Cable Select, the address depends on the condition of pin 28 of the AT interface cable. If pin 28 is ground (or low), the drive is a Master. If pin 28 is open (or logic high), the drive is a Slave.

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

55

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

7.11 Addressing of HDD registers

The host addresses the drive through a set of registers called a Task File. These registers are mapped into the host's

I/O space. Two chip select lines (CS0- and CS1-) and three address lines (DA00–02) are used to select one of these registers, while a DIOR- or DIOW- is provided at the specified time.

The chip select line CS0- is used to address the Command Block registers while the CS1- is used to address Control Block registers.

The following table shows the I/ O address map.

Table 36: I/O address map

CS0– CS1– DA2 DA1 DA0

1

CS0–

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

0

CS1–

1

1

1

1

0

0

0

0

1

DA2

1

1

0

0

1

1

0

0

1

DA1

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

DA0

DIOR– = 0 (Read) DIOW– = 0 (Write)

Command Block Registers

Data Reg.

Error Reg.

Data Reg.

Features Reg.

Sector count Reg.

LBA Low Reg

LBA Mid Reg

LBA High Reg

Sector count Reg.

LBA Low Reg

LBA Mid Reg

LBA High Reg

Device Reg

Status Reg.

Device Reg

Command Reg.

Control Block Registers

Alt. Status Reg.

Device control Reg.

DIOR– = 0 (Read) DIOW– = 0 (Write)

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

56

Part 2. Interface specification

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

57

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

58

8.0 General

8.1 Introduction

This specification describes the host interface of the Travelstar 80GN.

The interface conforms to the Working Document of Information technology, AT Attachment with Packet Interface

Extension (ATA/ATAPI-6) Revision 2, dated 2 August 2001, with certain limitations described in Section 9.0,

“Deviations from standard” on page 61.

The drive supports the following functions as Vendor Specific Functions:

• Address Offset Feature

• Format Unit Function

• SENSE CONDITION command

8.2 Terminology

Device

Host

First Command

INTRQ

The Travelstar 80GN drive

Host indicates the system that the device is attached to.

The first command which is executed after the power on reset (also known as a hard reset) is the Standby mode command.

Interrupt request (Device or Host)

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

59

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

60

9.0 Deviations from standard

The device conforms to the referenced specifications, with deviations described below.

The interface conforms to the Working Document of Information Technology, AT Attachment with Packet Interface

Extension (ATA/ATAPI-6) Revision 3, dated 30 October 2001, with the following deviation:

Standby Timer

Write Verify

S.M.A.R.T. Return Status

Standby timer is enabled by STANDBY command or IDLE command. The value in the Sector Count register shall be used to determine the time programmed into the Standby timer. If the Sector Count register is zero, the

Standby timer is automatically set to 109 minutes.

WRITE VERIFY command does not include read verification after write operation. The function is the same as WRITE SECTORS command.

S.M.A.R.T. RETURN STATUS subcommand does not check advisory attributes. This means that the device will not report a threshold exceeded condition unless the prefailure attributes exceed their corresponding thresholds. For example, a Power-On Hours Attribute never results in a negative reliability status.

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

61

September 19, 2003 10:28 am

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

62

10.0 Register

Table 37: Register Set

CS0-

N

N

N

N

N

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

N

N

N

N

N

A

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

CS1-

N

Addresses

DA2 x

1

1

0

1

1

1

1

1

1 x

1

1

0

0

0

0

0

DA1 x

1

1 x

0

DA0 x

0

1 x x

0

0

1

1

1 x

0

0

1

1

0

1

0

1

1

0

0

1 x

0

0

1

1

0

0

1

Functions

READ (DIOR-) WRITE (DIOW-)

Data bus high impedence Not used

Control block registers

Data bus high impedance

Data bus high impedance

Alternate Status

Device Address

Not used

Not used

Device Control

Not used

Command block registers

Data Data

Error Register

Sector Count

Features

Sector Count

LBA Low

LBA bits 0-7

LBA Mid

LBA bits 8-15

LBA Low

LBA bits 0-7

LBA Mid

LBA bits 8-15

LBA High

LBA bits 16-23

Device

LBA bits 24-27

Status

Invalid address

LBA High

LBA bits 16-23

Device

LBA bits 24-27

Command

Invalid address

Logic conventions: A = signal asserted

N = signal not asserted

x = either A or N

Communication to or from the device is through an I/O Register that routes the input or output data to or from the registers addressed by the signals from the host (CS0-, CS1-, DA2, DA1, DA0, DIOR- and DIOW).

The Command Block Registers are used for sending commands to the device or posting status from the device.

The Control Block Registers are used for device control and to post alternate status.

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

63

10.1 Alternate Status Register

Table 38: Alternate Status Register

7

BSY

6

RDY

5

DF

4

DSC

3

DRQ

2

COR

1

IDX

0

ERR

This register contains the same information as the Status Register. The only difference between this register and the

Status Register is that reading the Alternate Status Register does not imply an interrupt acknowledge or a clear of a

pending interrupt. See Section 10.12, "Status Register," on page 67 for the definition of the bits in this register.

10.2 Command Register

This register contains the command code being sent to the device. Command execution begins immediately after

this register is written. The command set is shown in Table 58: , "Command Set (1 of 2)," on page 97 and Table

59: , "Command Set (2 of 2)," on page 98. All other registers required for the command must be set up before writ-

ing to the Command Register.

10.3 Data Register

This register is used to transfer data blocks between the device data buffer and the host. It is also the register through which sector information is transferred on a Format Track command and the configuration information is transferred on an Identify Device command.

All data transfers are 16 bits wide, except for ECC byte transfers, which are 8 bits wide. Data transfers are PIO only.

The register contains valid data only when DRQ = 1 is in the Status Register.

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

64

10.4 Device Control Register

Table 39: Device Control Register

7

HOB

Bit

HOB

SRST

-IEN

6

-

5

-

4

-

3

1

2

SRST

1

-IEN

0

0

Definitions

HOB (high order byte) is defined by the 48-bit Address feature set. A write to any Command

Register shall clear the HOB bit to zero.

Software Reset. The device is held at reset when RST = 1. Setting RST = 0 again enables the device. To ensure that the device recognizes the reset, the host must set RST = 1 and wait for at least 5 ms before setting RST = 0.

Interrupt Enable. When IEN = 0, and the device is selected, the device interrupts to the host will be enabled. When IEN = 1, or the device is not selected, the device interrupts to the host will be disabled.

10.5 Drive Address Register

Table 40: Drive Address Register

7

HIZ

6

WTG

5

-H3

4

-H2

3

-H1

2

-H0

1

-DS1

0

-DS0

This register contains the inverted drive select and head select addresses of the currently selected drive.

Bit Definitions

HIZ

-WTG

-H3, -H2,-

H1,-H0-

-DS1

-DS0

High Impedance. This bit is not a device and will always be in a high impedance state.

Write Gate. This bit is 0 when writing to the disk device is in progress.

-H3, -H2,-H1,-H0-Head Select. These four bits are the one's complement of the binary coded address of the currently selected head. Bit -H0 is the least significant.

Drive Select 1. The Drive Select bit for device 1 is active low. DS1 = 0 when device 1 (slave) is selected and active.

Drive Select 0. The Drive Select bit for device 0 is active low. DS0 = 0 when device 0 (master) is selected and active.

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

65

10.6 Device/Head Register

Table 41: Device Head/Register

7

1

6

L

5

1

4

DRV

3

HS3

2

HS2

1

HS1

0

HS0

This register contains the device and head numbers.

Bit Definitions

L

DRV

HS3, HS2,

HS0

Binary encoded address mode select. When L = 0, addressing is by CHS mode. When L = 1, addressing is by LBA mode.

Device. When DRV = 0, device 0 (master) is selected. When DRV = 1, device 1 (Slave) is selected.

Head Select. These four bits indicate the binary encoded address of the head. Bit HS0 is the least significant bit. At command completion, these bits are updated to reflect the currently selected head. The head number may be from zero to the number of heads minus one. In LBA mode, HS3 through HS0 contain bits 24–27 of the LBA. At command completion, these bits are updated to reflect the current LBA bits 24–27.

10.7 Error Register

Table 42: Error Register

7

CRC

6

UNC

5

0

4

IDNF

3

0

2 1 0

ABRT TK0NF AMNF

This register contains the status from the last command executed by the device or a diagnostic code. At the completion of any command, except Execute Device Diagnostic, the contents of this register are always valid even if

ERR = 0 is in the Status Register.

Following a power on, a reset, or completion of an Execute Device Diagnostic command, this register contains a

diagnostic code. See Table 46: , "Diagnostic codes," on page 70 for the definitions.

Bit Definitions

ICRCE (CRC) Interface CRC Error. When CRC = 1, it indicates that a CRC error has occurred on the data bus during a Ultra DMA transfer.

UNC Uncorrectable Data Error. When UNC = 1 it indicates that an uncorrectable data error has been encountered.

IDNF(IDN)

ABRT

(ABT)

ID Not Found. When IDN = 1, it indicates that the requested sector's ID field could not be found.

Aborted Command. When ABT = 1, it indicates that the requested command has been aborted due to a device status error or an invalid parameter in an output register.

TK0NF (T0N) Track 0 Not Found. When T0N = 1, it indicates that track 0 was not found during a recallibrate command.

AMNF Address Mark Not Found. When AMN = 1, it indicates that the data address mark has not been found after finding the correct ID field for the requested sector.

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

66

10.8 Features Register

This register is command specific. This register is used with the Set Features command, the S.M.A.R.T. Function

Set command, and the Format Unit command.

10.9 LBA High Register

This register is command specific. This is used with the Set Features command, S.M.A.R.T. Function Set command and Format Unit command.

When 48-bit addressing commands are used, the "most recently written" content contains LBA Bits 16-23, and the

"previous content" contains Bits 40-47. The 48-bit Address feature set is described in Section 11.15, "48-bit

Address Feature Set," on page 89.

10.10 LBA Mid Register

This register contains Bits 8-15. At the end of the command, this register is updated to reflect the current LBA

Bits 8-15.

When 48-bit addressing commands are used, the "most recently written" content contains LBA Bits 8-15 and the

"previous content" contains Bits 32-39.

10.11 Sector Count Register

This register contains the number of sectors of data requested to be transferred on a read or write operation between the host and the device. If the value in the register is set to 0, a count of 256 sectors (in 28-bit addressing) or 65,536 sectors (in 48-bit addressing) is specified.

If the register is zero at command completion, the command was successful. If not successfully completed, the register contains the number of sectors which need to be transferred in order to complete the request.

The contents of the register are defined otherwise on some commands. These definitions are given in the command descriptions.

10.12 Status Register

Table 43: Status Register

7

BSY

6

DRDY

5

DF

4

DSC

3

DRQ

2

COR

1

IDX

0

ERR

This register contains the device status. The contents of this register are updated whenever an error occurs and at the completion of each command.

If the host reads this register when an interrupt is pending, it is considered to be the interrupt acknowledge. Any pending interrupt is cleared whenever this register is read.

If BSY=1, no other bits in the register are valid.

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

67

Bit Definitions

BSY

DRDY

(RDY)

DF

DSC

DRQ

CORR

IDX

ERR

Busy. Bit BSY=1 whenever the device is accessing the registers. The host should not read or write any registers when BSY=1. If the host reads any register when BSY=1, the contents of the Status

Register will be returned.

Device Ready. When bit RDY=1 it indicates that the device is capable of responding to a command. Bit RDY will be set to 0 during power on until the device is ready to accept a command.

Device Fault. It DF=1 it indicates that the device has detected a write fault condition. Bit DF is set to 0 after the Status Register is read by the host.

Device Seek Complete. If DSC=1, it indicates that a Seek has completed and the device head is settled over a track. Bit DSC is set to 0 by the device just before a Seek begins. When an error occurs, this bit is not changed until the Status Register is read by the host and at that time the bit again indicates the current Seek complete status. When the device enters into or is in Standby mode or Sleep mode, this bit is set by device in spite of the drive not spinning up.

Data Request. Bit DRQ=1 indicates that the device is ready to transfer a word or byte of data between the host and the device. The host should not write the Command register when DRQ=1.

Corrected Data. Always 0

IDXIndex. Bit IDX=1 once per revolution. Since IDX=1, only for a very short time during each revolution, the host may not see it set to 1 even if the host is reading the Status Register continuously. Therefore the host should not attempt to use IDX bit for timing purposes.

Error. Bit ERR=1 indicates that an error occurred during execution of the previous command. The

Error Register should be read to determine the error type. The device sets bit ERR=0 when the next command is received from the host.

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

68

11.0 General

11.1 Reset response

ATA has the following three types of resets:

Power On Reset (POR) The device executes a series of electrical circuitry diagnostics, spins up the head disk assembly, tests speed and other mechanical parametric, and sets default values.

Hard Reset (Hardware Reset) The RESET signal is negated in the ATA Bus. The device resets the interface circuitry and sets the default values.

Soft Reset (Software Reset) The SRST bit in the Device Control Register is set and then is reset. The device resets the interface circuitry according to the Set Features requirement.

The actions of each reset are shown in the table below.

Table 44: Reset response table

Aborting Host interface

Aborting Device operation

Initialization of hardware

Internal diagnostic

Starting or Spinning Up spindle motor

Initialization of registers (*2)

DASP- handshake

PDIAG- handshake

Reverting programmed parameters to default

Number of CHS (set by Initialize Device Parameters)

Multiple mode

Write Cache

Delayed Write

Read look-ahead

ECC bytes

Volatile max. Address

Address offset mode

Power mode

Reset Standby timer value (*5)

POR

o o o o

o o

(*6)

(*6) o hard reset soft reset o o o o o o

(*1) x x x

(*4) o o x o

(*3)

(*1) x x x

(*4) o o – execute x – does not execute

Notes:

(*1) Execute after the data in write cache has been written.

(*2)

The default value on POR is shown in Table 45: “Default Register Values” on page 70.

(*3) The Set Features command with Feature register = CCh enables the device to revert these parameters to the power on defaults.

(*4) In the case of sleep mode, the device goes to standby mode. In other cases, the device does not change current mode.

(*5) After reset the Standby timer value is set to 109 minutes.

(*6) Set according to the initial power mode selection.

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

69

11.2 Register initialization

After a power on, a hard reset, or a software reset, the register values are initialized as shown in the table below.

Table 45: Default Register Values

Register

Error

Sector Count

LBA Low

LBA Mid

LBA High

Device

Status

Alternate Status

Default Value

Diagnostic Code

01h

01h

00h

00h

A0h

50h

50h

If an Execute Device Diagnostic command is carried out, if the system is powered on, or if a hard reset occurs, the system generates an Error Register diagnostic code. See the table below for a description of the codes.

Table 46: Diagnostic codes

Code Description

01h

02h

03h

04h

05h

8xh

No error detected

Formatter device error

Sector buffer error

ECC circuitry error

Controller microprocessor error

Device 1 failed

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

70

11.3 Diagnostic and Reset considerations

The Set Max password, the Set Max security mode and the Set Max unlock counter are not retained over a Power

On Reset but are retained over a Hard Reset or Soft Reset.

For each Reset and Execute Device Diagnostic, the diagnostic is done as follows:

Power On

Reset, Hard

Reset

Soft Reset

Execute Device

Diagnostic

DASP– is read by Device 0 to determine if Device 1 is present. If Device 1 is present,

Device 0 shall read PDIAG– to determine when it is valid to clear the BSY bit and whether Device 1 has powered on or reset without error, otherwise Device 0 clears the

BSY bit whenever it is ready to accept commands. Device 0 may assert DASP– to indicate device activity. If Device 1 is not present, Device 0 does not Assert DASP– at

POR.

If Device 1 is present, Device 0 shall read PDIAG– to determine when it is valid to clear the BSY bit and whether Device 1 has reset without any errors; otherwise, Device 0 shall simply reset and clear the BSY bit. DASP– is asserted by Device 0 (and Device 1 if it is present) in order to indicate device active.

If Device 1 is present, Device 0 shall read PDIAG– to determine when it is valid to clear the BSY bit and if Device 1 passed or failed the EXECUTE DEVICE DIAGNOSTIC command; otherwise, Device 0 shall simply execute its diagnostics and then clear the

BSY bit. DASP– is asserted by Device 0 (and Device 1 if it is present) in order to indicate that the device is active.

In each case – Power On Reset [Hard Reset], Soft Reset, and the Execute Device Diagnostic command – the

Device 0 Error register value is interpreted using the table below.

Table 47: Reset error register values

Device 1 present?

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

No

PDIAG- Asserted?

Yes

Yes

No

No

(not read)

(not read)

Device 0 Passed

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

Error Register

01h

0xh

81h

8xh

01h

0xh

The "x" indicates the appropriate Diagnostic Code for the Power on, RESET-, Soft Reset, or Device Diagnostic error.

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

71

11.4 Power-off considerations

11.4.1 Load/Unload

Load/Unload is a functional mechanism of the hard disk drive. It is controlled by the drive microcode. Specifically, unloading of the heads is invoked by the following commands.

Table 48: Device behavior by ATA command

Command

Standby

Standby Immediate

Sleep

Response

UL -> Comp.

UL -> Comp.

UL -> Comp.

Reset

Soft Reset

Hard Reset

UL

Comp

Rdy

(*1)

= unload

Response

= complete

= interface ready

Rdy (*1)

UL -> Rdy

Load/Unload condition is not changed by Soft Reset

Load is also invoked as the idle command.

The specified start/stop life of the product assumes that load/unload is operated normally, NOT in emergency mode.

11.4.2 Emergency unload

When the drive power is interrupted with the heads still loaded, the microcode cannot operate and the normal

5V power is unavailable to unload the heads. In this case, normal unload is not possible, so the heads are unloaded by routing the back EMF of the spinning motor to the voice coil. The actuator velocity is greater than the normal case, and the unload process is inherently less controllable without a normal seek current profile.

Emergency unload is intended to be invoked in rare situations. Because this operation is inherently uncontrolled, it is more mechanically stressful than a normal unload.

A single emergency unload operation is more stressful than 100 normal unloads. Use of emergency unload reduces the start/stop life of the drive at a rate at least 100 times faster than that of normal unload and may damage the drive.

11.4.3 Required power-off sequence

The following are examples of such problems which can result when power is removed on most drives at an arbitrary time:

• Data is lost from the write buffer.

• If the drive is writing a sector, a partially-written sector with an incorrect ECC block results, the sector contents are destroyed, and reading that sector results in a hard error.

• Heads may land in the data zone instead of the landing zone depending on the design of the drive.

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

72

You may then turn off the drive in the following order:

1. Issue Standby Immediate or sleep command

2. Wait until COMMAND COMPLETE STATUS is returned. (It may take up to 350 ms in a typical case.)

3. Terminate power to drive

This power-down sequence should be followed for entry into any system power-down state, system suspend state, or system hibernation state. In a robustly designed system, emergency unload is limited to rare scenarios such as battery removal during operation.

11.5 Sector Addressing Mode

All addressing of data sectors recorded on the device's media is done by a logical sector address. The logical CHS address for the drive is different from the actual physical CHS location of the data sector on the disk media.

The drive supports both Logical CHS Addressing Mode and LBA Addressing Mode as the sector addressing mode.

The host system may select either the currently selected CHS translation addressing or LBA addressing on a command-by-command basis by using the L bit in the DEVICE/HEAD register. A host system must set the L bit to

1 if the host uses LBA Addressing mode.

11.5.1 Logical CHS addressing mode

The logical CHS addressing is made up of three fields: the cylinder number, the head number, and the sector number.

Sectors are numbered from 1 to the maximum value allowed by the current CHS translation mode but cannot exceed

255 (0FFh). Heads are numbered from 0 to the maximum value allowed by the current CHS translation mode but cannot exceed 15 (0Fh). Cylinders are numbered from 0 to the maximum value allowed by the current CHS translation mode but cannot exceed 65535 (0FFFFh).

When the host selects a CHS translation mode using the INITIALIZE DEVICE PARAMETERS command, the host requests the number of sectors per logical track and the number of heads per logical cylinder. The device then computes the number of logical cylinders available in requested mode.

The default CHS translation mode is described in the Identify Device Information. The current CHS translation mode also is described in the Identify Device Information.

11.5.2 LBA addressing mode

Logical sectors on the device shall be linearly mapped with the first LBA addressed sector (sector 0) being the same sector as the first logical CHS addressed sector (cylinder 0, head 0, sector 1). Irrespective of the logical CHS translation mode currently in effect, the LBA address of a given logical sector does not change. The following formula is always true:

LBA = ((cylinder x heads_per_cylinder + heads) x sectors_per_track) + sector – 1 where heads_per_cylinder and sectors_per_track are the current translation mode values.

On LBA addressing mode, the LBA value is set to the following register:

Device

LBA High

LBA Mid

LBA Low

<- - - LBA bits 27–24

<- - - LBA bits 23–16

<- - - LBA bits 15–8

<- - - LBA bits 7–0

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

73

11.6 Power management features

The power management feature set permits a host to modify the behavior in a manner which reduces the power required to operate. The power management feature set provides a set of commands and a timer that enables a device to implement low power consumption modes.

The drive implements the following set of functions:

• A Standby timer

• Idle command

• Idle Immediate command

• Sleep command

• Standby command

• Standby Immediate command

11.6.1 Power mode

Sleep Mode The lowest power consumption when the device is powered on occurs in Sleep Mode. When in Sleep Mode, the device requires a reset to be activated.

Standby

Mode

The device interface is capable of accepting commands, but since the media may not be immediately accessible, there is a delay while waiting for the spindle to reach operating speed.

Idle Mode

Refer to Section 11.7 “Advanced Power Management (ABLE-3) feature” on page 75.

Active

Mode

The device is in execution of a command or accessing the disk media with the read lookahead function or the write cache function.

11.6.2 Power management commands

The Check Power Mode command allows a host to determine if a device is currently in, going to, or leaving standby mode.

The Idle and Idle Immediate commands move a device to idle mode immediately from the active or standby modes. The idle command also sets the standby timer count and starts the standby timer.

The sleep command moves a device to sleep mode. The device's interface becomes inactive at the completion of the sleep command. A reset is required to move a device out of sleep mode. When a device exits sleep mode it will enter standby mode.

The Standby and Standby Immediate commands move a device to standby mode immediately from the active or idle modes. The standby command also sets the standby timer count.

11.6.3 Standby/Sleep command completion time

1. Confirm the completion of writing cached data in the buffer to media.

2. Unload the heads on the ramp.

3. Set the DRDY bit and the DSC bit in Status Register.

4. Set the INTRQ (completion of the command).

5. Activate the spindle break to stop the spindle motor.

6. Wait until the spindle motor is stopped.

7. Perform the post process.

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

74

11.6.4 Standby timer

The standby timer provides a method for the device to automatically enter standby mode from either active or idle mode following a host programmed period of inactivity. If the device is in the active or idle mode, the device waits for the specified time period and if no command is received, the device automatically enters the standby mode.

If the value of the SECTOR COUNT register on Idle command or the Standby command is set to "00h", the device will automatically set the standby timer to 109 minutes.

11.6.5 Status

In the active, idle, and standby modes, the device shall have the RDY bit of the status register set. If the BSY bit is not set, the device shall be ready to accept any command.

In sleep mode, the device's interface is not active. A host shall not attempt to read the status of the device or issue commands to the device.

11.6.6 Interface capability for power modes

Each power mode affects the physical interface as defined in the following table:

Table 49: Power conditions

Mode

Active

Idle

Standby

Sleep

BSY o x x o

RDY Interface active

1 x x

1

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

Media

Active

Active

Inactive

Inactive

Ready (RDY) is not a power condition. A device may post ready at the interface even though the media may not be accessible.

The interface is inactive in sleep mode, but the access to the interface registers and the validity of INTRQ is guaranteed for two seconds after the Sleep command is completed. After this period, the contents of interface registers may be lost. Since the contents of interface registers may be invalid, the host should NOT check the Status register nor the Alternate Status register prior to issuing a soft reset to wake up a device.

11.6.7 Initial Power Mode at Power On

After power on or hard reset the device goes to IDLE mode or STANDBY mode depending on the option. Refer to

section 4.4.3 “Operating modes” on page 19 for the initial power mode selection.

11.7 Advanced Power Management (ABLE-3) feature

This feature provides power saving without performance degradation. The Adaptive Battery Life Extender 3

(ABLE-3) technology intelligently manages transition among power modes within the device by monitoring access patterns of the host.

This technology has three idle modes; Performance Idle mode, Active Idle mode, and Low Power Idle mode.

This feature allows the host to select an advanced power management level. The advanced power management level is a scale from the lowest power consumption setting of 01h to the maximum performance level of FEh. Device performance may increase with increasing advanced power management levels. Device power consumption may

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

75

increase with increasing advanced power management levels. The advanced power management levels contain discrete bands, described in the section of Set Feature command in detail.

This feature set uses the following functions:

• A SET FEATURES subcommand to enable Advanced Power Management

• A SET FEATURES subcommand to disable Advanced Power Management

The Advanced Power Management feature is independent of the Standby timer setting. If both Advanced Power

Management level and the Standby timer are set, the device will go to the Standby state when the timer times out or the device's Advanced Power Management algorithm indicates that it is time to enter the Standby state.

The IDENTIFY DEVICE response word 83, bit 3 indicates that Advanced Power Management feature is supported if set. Word 91, bit 7-0 indicates that Advanced Power Management is enabled if set. Word 91, bits 7-0 contain the current Advanced Power Management level if Advanced Power Management is enabled.

11.7.1 Performance Idle Mode

This mode is usually entered immediately after Active mode command processing is complete, instead of conventional idle mode. In Performance Idle mode, all electronic components remain powered and full frequency servo remains operational. This provides instantaneous response to the next command. The duration of this mode is intelligently managed as described below.

11.7.2 Active Idle Mode

In this mode, power consumption is 45–55% less than that of Performance Idle mode. Additional electronics are powered off and the head is parked near the mid-diameter of the disk without servoing. Recovery time to Active mode is about 20 ms.

11.7.3 Low Power Idle Mode

Power consumption is 60–65% less than that of Performance Idle mode. The heads are unloaded on the ramp but the spindle is still rotated at the full speed. Recovery time to Active mode is about 300ms.

11.7.4 Transition time

The transition time is dynamically managed by the user's recent access pattern, instead of fixed times. The ABLE-3 algorithm monitors the interval between commands instead of the command frequency of ABLE-2. The algorithm supposes that the next command will come with the same command interval distribution as the previous access pattern. The algorithm calculates the expected average saving energy and response delay for next command in several transition time case based on this assumption. And it selects the most effective transition time with the condition that the calculated response delay is shorter than the value calculated from the specified level by Set

Feature Enable Advanced Power Management command.

The optimal time to enter Active Idle mode is variable depending on the recent behavior of the user. It is not possible to achieve the same level of Power savings with a fixed entry time into Active Idle because every user's data and access pattern is different. The optimum entry time changes over time.

The same algorithm works for entering into Low Power Idle mode and Standby mode, which consumes less power but needs more recovery time switching from this mode to Active mode.

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

76

11.8 S.M.A.R.T. Function

The intent of Self-monitoring, analysis, and reporting technology (S.M.A.R.T.) is to protect user data and prevent unscheduled system downtime that may be caused by predictable degradation and/or fault of the device. By monitoring and storing critical performance and calibration parameters, S.M.A.R.T. devices employ sophisticated data analysis algorithms to predict the likelihood of near-term degradation or fault condition. By alerting the host system of a negative reliability status condition, the host system can warn the user of the impending risk of a data loss and advise the user of appropriate action.

Since S.M.A.R.T. utilizes the internal device microprocessor and other device resources, there may be some small overhead associated with its operation. However, special care has been taken in the design of the S.M.A.R.T. algorithms to minimize the impact to host system performance. Actual impact of S.M.A.R.T. overhead is dependent on the specific device design and the usage patterns of the host system. To further ensure minimal impact to the user,

S.M.A.R.T. capable devices are shipped from the device manufacturer's factory with the S.M.A.R.T. feature disabled. S.M.A.R.T. capable devices can be enabled by the system OEMs at time of system integration or in the field by after-market products.

11.8.1 Attributes

Attributes are the specific performance or calibration parameters that are used in analyzing the status of the device.

Attributes are selected by the device manufacturer based on that attribute's ability to contribute to the prediction of degrading or faulty conditions for that particular device. The specific set of attributes being used and the identity of these attributes is vendor specific and proprietary.

11.8.2 Attribute values

Attribute values are used to represent the relative reliability of individual performance or calibration attributes.

Higher attribute values indicate that the analysis algorithms being used by the device are predicting a lower probability of a degrading or fault condition existing. Accordingly, lower attribute values indicate that the analysis algorithms being used by the device are predicting a higher probability of a degrading or fault condition existing. There is no implied linear reliability relationship corresponding to the numerical relationship between different attribute values for any particular attribute.

11.8.3 Attribute thresholds

Each attribute value has a corresponding attribute threshold limit which is used for direct comparison to the attribute value to indicate the existence of a degrading or faulty condition. The numerical value of the attribute thresholds are determined by the device manufacturer through design and reliability testing and analysis. Each attribute threshold represents the lowest limit to which its corresponding attribute value can be equal while still retaining a positive reliability status. Attribute thresholds are set at the device manufacturer's factory and cannot be changed in the field.

The valid range for attribute thresholds is from 1 through 253 decimal.

11.8.4 Threshold exceeded condition

If one or more attribute values are less than or equal to their corresponding attribute thresholds, then the device reliability status is negative, indicating an impending degrading or faulty condition.

11.8.5 S.M.A.R.T. commands

The S.M.A.R.T. commands provide access to attribute values, attribute thresholds and other logging and reporting information.

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

77

11.8.6 S.M.A.R.T. operation with power management modes

The device saves attribute values automatically on every head unload timing except the emergency unload, even if the attribute auto save feature is not enabled. The head unload is done not only by Standby, Standby Immediate,

Sleep command, and Hard Reset, but also by the Standby timer. So it is not necessary for a host system to enable the attribute auto save feature when it utilizes the power management. If the attribute auto save feature is enabled, attribute values will be saved after 30 minutes have passed since the last saving, besides above condition.

11.9 Security Mode Feature Set

Security Mode Feature Set is a powerful security feature. With a device lock password, a user can prevent unauthorized access to a device even if it is removed from the computer.

New commands are supported for this feature as listed below:

Security Set Password

Security Unlock

Security Erase Prepare

Security Erase Unit

Security Freeze Lock

Security Disable Password

('F1'h)

('F2'h)

('F3'h)

('F4'h)

('F5'h)

('F6'h)

11.9.1 Security mode

The following security modes are provided:

Device Locked

Mode

Device Unlocked

Mode

The device disables media access commands after power on. Media access commands are enabled by either a Security Unlock command or a Security Erase

Unit command.

The device enables all commands. If a password is not set this mode is entered after power on, otherwise it is entered by a Security Unlock or a Security Erase Unit command.

Device Frozen Mode The device enables all commands except those which can update the device lock function, set/change password. The device enters this mode via a Security Freeze

Lock command. It cannot quit this mode until power off.

11.9.2 Security level

The following security levels are provided:

High level security When the device lock function is enabled and the User Password is forgotten, the device can be unlocked via a Master Password.

Maximum level security

When the device lock function is enabled and the User Password is forgotten, then only the Master Password with a Security Erase Unit command can unlock the device. Then user data is erased.

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

78

11.9.3 Password

This function can have two types of passwords as described below.

Master Password

User Password

When the Master Password is set, the device does NOT enable the Device Lock

Function, and the device CANNOT be locked with the Master Password, but the

Master Password can be used for unlocking the locked device.

The User Password should be given or changed by a system user. When the User

Password is set, the device enables the Device Lock Function, and then the device is locked on the next power on reset or hard reset.

The system manufacturer or dealer who intends to enable the device lock function for end users must set the master password even if only single level password protection is required. Otherwise, the default master password which is set by Hitachi Global Storage Technologies can unlock a device that is locked with a user password

11.9.4 Master Password Revision Code

This Master Password Revision Code is set by Security Set Password command with the master password. And this revision code field is returned in the Identify Device command word 92. The valid revision codes are 0001h to

FFFEh. The default value of Master Password Revision Code is FFFEh. Values 0000h and FFFFh are reserved.

11.9.4.1 Master Password setting

The system manufacturer or dealer can set an initial Master Password using the Security Set Password command, without enabling the Device Lock Function.

11.9.4.2 User Password setting

When a User Password is set, the device will automatically enter lock mode the next time the device is powered on.

Table 50: Initial setting

< Setting password >

POR

Set Password with User Password

Normal operation

POR

Power off

Device locked mode

< No setting password >

POR

Normal operation

POR

Power off

Device unlocked mode

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

79

11.9.4.3 Operation from POR after user password is set

When Device Lock Function is enabled, the device rejects media access command until a Security Unlock command is successfully completed.

Table 51: Usual operation for POR

POR

Device Locked mode

N

Unlock CMD

Password

Match ?

Y

Erase Prepare

Erase Unit

Password

Match ?

Y

N

Media Access

Command (*1)

Non-media Access

Command (*1)

Reject Complete

Enter Device

Unlock mode

Complete

Erase Unit

Lock function

Disable

Normal operation : All commands are available

Freeze Lock command

Enter Device Frozen mode

Normal Operation expect Set Password,

Disable Password, Erase Unit, Unlock commands.

(*1) — refers to the commands in Table 53: “Command table for device lock operation” on page 82.

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

80

11.9.4.4 User Password lost

If the User Password is forgotten and High level security is set, the system user cannot access any data. However the device can be unlocked using the Master Password.

If a system user forgets the User Password and Maximum security level is set, data access is impossible. However the device can be unlocked using the Security Erase Unit command to unlock the device and erase all user data with the Master Password.

Table 52: Password lost

User Password Lost

LEVEL ? High

Maximum

Unlock EMD with Master Password

Normal operation

Erase Prepare Command

Erase Unit Command

with Master Password

Normal operation but data lost

11.9.4.5 Attempt limit for the SECURITY UNLOCK command

The SECURITY UNLOCK command has an attempt limit the purpose of which is to prevent someone from attempting to unlock the drive with various passwords numerous times.

The device counts the password mismatch. If the password does not match, the device counts it without distinguishing the Master password and the User password. If the count reaches 5, EXPIRE bit (bit 4) of Word 128 in Identify Device information is set, and then the SECURITY ERASE UNIT command and the SECURITY

UNLOCK command are aborted until a hard reset or a power off. The count and EXPIRE bit are cleared after a power on reset or a hard reset.

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

81

11.9.5 Command table

This table shows the device's response to commands when the Security Mode Feature Set (Device lock function) is enabled.

The head unload is done not only by Standby, Standby Immediate, Sleep command and Hard Reset, but also by the

Standby timer

Table 53: Command table for device lock operation

Command

Device Mode

Locked Unlocked Frozen o o o o o o

Command

Set Max ADDRESS

Device Mode

Locked Unlocked Frozen x o o

Check Power Mode

Enable/Disable Delayed

Write

Device Configuration

RESTORE

Device Configuration

FREEZE LOCK

Device Configuration

IDENTIFY

Device Configuration SET

Execute Device Diagnostic

Flush Cache

Flush Cache EXT

Format Track

Format Unit

Identify Device

Idle

Idle Immediate

Initialize Device Parameters

Read Buffer x o o x o x x x x o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o

Set Max ADDRESS EXT

Set Max FREEZE LOCK

Set Max LOCK

Set Max SET PASSWORD

Set Max UNLOCK

Set Multiple Mode

Sleep

S.M.A.R.T. Disable

Operations

S.M.A.R.T. Enable/Disable automatic off-line

S.M.A.R.T. Enable/Disable

Attribute Autosave

S.M.A.R.T. Enable

Operations

S.M.A.R.T. Exectue Off-line

Immdeiate

S.M.A.R.T. Read Attribute

Values

S.M.A.R.T. Read Attribute

Thresholds x o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o Read DMA

Read DMA EXT

Read Long

Read Multiple

Read Multiple EXT

Read Native Max ADDRESS

Read Native Max ADDRESS

EXT

Read Sector(s)

Read Sector(s) EXT

Read Verify Sector(s) EXT

Recalibrate

Security Disable Password

Security Erase Prepare x x x o x o x x x x x o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o x o o o o o o o o

S.M.A.R.T. Read log sector

S.M.A.R.T. Write log sector

S.M.A.R.T. Return Status

S.M.A.R.T. Save Attributre

Values

Standby

Standby Immediate

Write Buffer

Write DMA

Write DMA EXT o o o o o x o o x o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

82

Table 53: Command table for device lock operation

Security Erase Unit

Security Freeze Lock o x o o

Security Set Password

Security Unlock

Seek x o o o o o x o x x o

Write Long

Write Multiple

Write Multiple EXT

Write Sector(s)

Write Sector(s) EXT

Write Verify x x x x x x o o o o o o o o o o o o

11.10 Protected Area Function

Protected Area Function provides a protected area which cannot be accessed via conventional methods. This protected area is used to contain critical system data such as BIOS or system management information. The contents of the entire system main memory may also be dumped into the protected area to resume after a system power off.

The LBA/CYL changed by the following commands affects the Identify Device Information.

Two commands are defined for this function:

• Read Native Max ADDRESS ('F8'h)

• Set Max ADDRESS ('F9'h)

Four security extension commands are implemented as sub functions of the Set Max ADDRESS:

• Set Max SET PASSWORD

• Set Max LOCK

• Set Max FREEZE LOCK

• Set Max UNLOCK

11.10.1 Example for operation (In LBA Mode)

The following example uses hypothetical values.

Device characteristics:

Capacity (native)

Max LBA (native)

Required size for protected area

Required blocks for protected area

Customer usable device size

Customer usable sector count

LBA range for protected area

536,870,912 bytes (536MB)

1,048,575 (0FFFFFh)

8,388,608 bytes

16,384 (004000h)

528,482,304 bytes (528MB)

1,032,192 (0FC000h)

0FC000h to 0FFFFFh

1. Shipping drives from the drive manufacturer

When the drive is shipped from the manufacturer, the device has been tested to have a capacity of 536MB, flagging the media defects not visible by the system.

2. Preparing drives at system manufacturer

Special utility software is required to define the size of the protected area and to store the data in it. The sequence is:

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

83

Issue Read Native Max ADDRESS command to get the real device max of LBA/CYL. Returned value shows that native device Max LBA is 0FFFFFh regardless of the current setting.

Make the entire device accessible, including the protected area, by setting the device Max LBA as 0FFFFFh via Set Max ADDRESS command. The option could be either nonvolatile or volatile.

Test the sectors for protected area (LBA > = 0FC000h) if required.

Write information data such as BIOS code within the protected area.

Change maximum LBA using Set Max ADDRESS command to 0FBFFFh with nonvolatile option.

From this point, the protected area cannot be accessed until next Set Max ADDRESS command is issued. Any

BIOS, device driver, or application software accesses the drive as if it is a 528 MB device because the device behaves like a 528 MB device.

3. Conventional usage without system software support:

Since the drive works as a 528 MB device, there is no special care required for normal use of this device.

4. Advanced usage using protected area.

The data in the protected area is accessed by the following steps.

1. Issue Read Native Max ADDRESS command to get the real device max LBA/CYL. Returned value shows that native device Max LBA is 0FFFFFh regardless of the current setting.

2. Make entire device accessible, including the protected area, by setting device Max LBA as 0FFFFFh via Set

Max ADDRESS command with the volatile option. By using this option, unexpected power removal or reset will prevent the protected area from remaining accessible.

3. Read information data from protected area.

4. Issue hard reset or POR to inhibit any access to the protected area.

11.10.2 Set Max security extension commands

The Set Max SET PASSWORD command allows the host to define the password to be used during the current power on cycle. This password is not related to the password used for the Security Mode Feature set. When the password is set, the device is in the Set Max Unlocked mode.

This command requests a transfer of a single sector of data from the host. The following figure defines the content of this sector of information. The password is retained by the device until the next power cycle. When the device accepts this command, the device is in Set Max Unlocked mode.

Table 54: Set Max SET PASSWORD data content

Word

0

1-16

17-255

Content

Reserved

Password (32 bytes)

Reserved

The Set Max LOCK command allows the host to disable the Set Max commands (except Set Max UNLOCK and

Set Max FREEZE LOCK) until the next power cycle or the issuance and acceptance of the Set Max UNLOCK command. When this command is accepted, the device is in the Set Max Locked mode.

The Set Max UNLOCK command changes the device from the Set Max Locked mode to the Set Max Unlocked mode.

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

84

This command requests a transfer of a single sector of data from the host. The figure shown above defines the content of this sector of information. The password supplied in the sector of data transferred is compared with the stored Set Max password. If the password compare fails, then the device returns command aborted and decrements the unlock counter. On the acceptance of the Set Max LOCK command, this counter is set to a value of five and is decremented for each password mismatch when Set Max UNLOCK is issued and the device is locked. When this counter reaches zero, then the Set Max UNLOCK command returns command aborted until a power cycle.

The Set Max FREEZE LOCK command allows the host to disable the SET MAX commands (including Set Max

UNLOCK) until the next power cycle. When this command is accepted the device is in the Set Max Frozen mode.

The password, the Set Max security mode, and the unlock counter do not persist over a power cycle but persist over a hardware or software reset.

NOTE: If this command is immediately preceded by a Read Native MAX ADDRESS command, it shall be interpreted as a Set Max ADDRESS command regardless of Feature register value.

Table 55: Set Max security mode transition

11.11 Address Offset Feature (vendor specific)

Computer systems perform initial code loading (booting) by reading from a predefined address on a disk drive. To allow an alternate bootable operating system to exist in a reserved area on a disk drive this feature provides a Set

Features function to temporarily offset the drive address space. The offset address space wraps around so that the entire disk drive address space remains addressable in offset mode. The Set Max pointer is set to the end of the reserved area to protect the data in the user area when operating in offset mode. This protection can be removed by a Set Max Address command to move the Set Max pointer to the end of the drive. But any commands which access sectors across the original native maximum LBA are rejected with error, even if this protection is removed by a Set

Max Address command.

11.11.1 Enable/Disable Address Offset Mode

Subcommand code 09h Enable Address Offset Mode offsets address Cylinder 0, Head 0, Sector 1, LBA 0, to the start of the nonvolatile protected area established using the Set Max Address command. The offset condition is

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

85

cleared by Subcommand 89h Disable Address Offset Mode, Hardware reset or Power on Reset. If Reverting to

Power on Defaults has been enabled by Set Features command, it is cleared by Soft reset as well. Upon entering offset mode the capacity of the drive returned in the Identify Device data is the size of the former protected area. A subsequent Set Max Address command with the address returned by the Read Max Address command allows access to the entire drive. Addresses wrap so the entire drive remains addressable.

If a nonvolatile protected area has not been established before the device receives a Set Features Enable Address

Offset Mode command, the command fails with Abort error status.

Disable Address Offset Feature removes the address offset and sets the size of the drive reported by the Identify

Device command back to the size specified in the last nonvolatile Set Max Address command.

Table 56: Device address map before and after Set Feature

11.11.2 Identify Device Data

Identify Device data, word 83, bit 7 indicates the device supports the Address Offset Feature. Identify Device data, word 86, bit 7 indicates the device is in Address Offset mode.

11.11.3 Exceptions in Address Offset Mode

Any commands which access sectors across the original native maximum LBA are rejected with error, even if the access protection is removed by a Set Max Address command.

Read Look Ahead operation is not carried out, even if it is enabled by the Set Feature command.

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

86

11.12 Seek Overlap

The drive provides accurate seek time measurement method. The seek command is usually used to measure the device seek time by accumulating execution time for a number of seek commands. With typical implementation of the seek command, this measurement must include the device and host command overhead. To eliminate this overhead, the drive overlaps the seek command as described below.

The first seek command completes before the actual seek operation is over. Then the device can receive the next seek command from the host. However, the actual seek operation for the next seek command starts right after completion of the actual seek operation for the first seek command. The execution of two seek commands overlaps excluding the actual seek operation.

With this overlap, total elapsed time for a number of seek commands is the total accumulated time for the actual seek operation plus one pre and post overhead. When the number of seeks is large, this overhead can be ignored.

Table 57: Seek overlap

(1) With overlap

Host process

Device process

Seek operation

Overhead A

Total time = (n-1) * (Seek operation) + A + B

(2) Without overlap

Host process

Device process

Seek operation

Overhead A B+A

Total time = n * (Seek operation + A + B)

B+A

B

B

11.13 Write Cache function

Write cache is a performance enhancement whereby the device reports completion of the write command (Write

Sectors and Write Multiple) to the host as soon as the device has received all of the data in its buffer. The device assumes responsibility to write the data subsequently onto the disk.

• While writing data after completed acknowledgment of a write command, soft reset, or hard reset does not affect its operation. But power off terminates writing operation immediately and unwritten data is lost.

• Flush cache, Soft reset, Standby, Standby Immediate, and Sleep are executed after the completion of writing to disk media on enabling write cache function. The host system can confirm the completion of write cache operation by issuing flush cache command, Soft reset, Standby command, Standby Immediate command, or Sleep command, and confirming the completion of the issued command.

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

87

11.14 Reassign Function

The Reassign Function is used with read commands and write commands. The sectors of data for reassignment are prepared as the spare data sector. The one entry can register 256 consecutive sectors maximum.

This reassignment information is registered internally, and the information is available right after completing the reassign function. Also the information is used on the next power on reset or hard reset.

If the number of the spare sector reaches 0 sector, the reassign function will be disabled automatically.

The spare tracks for reassignment are located at regular intervals from Cylinder 0. As a result of reassignment, the physical location of logically sequenced sectors is dispersed.

11.14.1 Auto Reassign Function

The sectors that show some errors may be reallocated automatically when specific conditions are met. The spare tracks for reallocation are located at regular intervals from Cylinder 0. The conditions for auto-reallocation are described below.

Nonrecovered write errors

When a write operation can not be completed after the Error Recovery Procedure (ERP) is fully carried out, the sector(s) are reallocated to the spare location. An error is reported to the host system only when the write cache is disabled and the auto reallocation fails.

If the number of available spare sectors reaches 16 sectors, the write cache function will be disabled automatically.

Nonrecovered read errors

When a read operation fails after a defined ERP is fully carried out, a hard error is reported to the host system. This location is registered internally as a candidate for the reallocation. When a registered location is specified as a target of a write operation, a sequence of media verifications is performed automatically. When the result of this verification meets the criteria, this sector is reallocated.

Recovered read errors

When a read operation for a sector fails once and then is recovered at the specific ERP step, this sector of data is reallocated automatically. A media verification sequence may be run prior to the relocation according to the predefined conditions.

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

88

11.15 48-bit Address Feature Set

The 48-bit Address feature set allows devices with capacities up to 281,474,976,710,655 sectors. This allows device capacity up to 144,115,188,075,855,360 bytes. In addition, the number of sectors that may be transferred by a single command are increased by increasing the allowable sector count to 16 bits.

• Commands unique to the 48-bit Address feature set are:

• Flush Cache Ext

• Read DMA Ext

• Read Multiple Ext

• Read Native Max Address Ext

• Read Sector(s) Ext

• Read Verify Sector(s) Ext

• Set Max Address Ext

• Write DMA Ext

• Write Multiple Ext

• Write Sector(s) Ext

The 48-bit Address feature set operates in LBA addressing only. Devices also implement commands using 28-bit addressing, and 28-bit and 48-bit commands may be intermixed.

In a device, the Features, the Sector Count, the LBA Low/Mid/High registers are a two-byte-deep FIFO. Each time one of these registers is written, the new content written is placed into the "most recently written" location and the previous content is moved to "previous content" location.

The host may read the "previous content" of the Features, the Sector Count, the LBA Low/Mid/High registers by first setting the High Order Bit (HOB, bit 7) of the Device control register to one and then reading the desired register. If HOB in the Device Control register is cleared to zero, the host reads the "most recently written" content when the register is read. A write to any Command Block register shall cause the device to clear the HOB bit to zero in the Device Control register. The "most recently written" content always gets written by a register write regardless of the state of HOB in the Device Control register.

Support of the 48-bit Address feature set is indicated in the Identify Device response bit 10 word 83. In addition, the maximum user LBA address accessible by 48-bit addressable commands is contained in Identify Device response words 100 through 103.

When the 48-bit Address feature set is implemented, the native maximum address is the value returned by a Read

Native Max Address Ext command. If the native maximum address is equal to or less than 268,435,455, a Read

Native Max Address shall return the native maximum address. If the native maximum address is greater than

268,435,455, a Read Native Max Address shall return a value of 268,435,455.

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

89

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

90

12.0 Command protocol

The commands are grouped into different classes according to the protocols followed for command execution. The command classes with their associated protocols are defined below.

For all commands, the host must first check to see if BSY = 1, and should proceed no further unless and until

BSY = 0. For all commands, the host must also wait for RDY = 1 before proceeding.

A device must maintain either BSY = 1 or DRQ = 1 at all times until the command is completed. The INTRQ signal is used by the device to signal most, but not all, times when the BSY bit is changed from 1 to 0 during command execution.

A command shall only be interrupted with a hardware or software reset. The result of writing to the Command register while BSY = 1 or DRQ = 1 is unpredictable and may result in data corruption. A command should only be interrupted by a reset at times when the host thinks there may be a problem, such as a device that is no longer responding.

Interrupts are cleared when the host reads the Status Register, issues a reset, or writes to the Command Register.

See Section 14.0, “Time-out values” on page 193 for the device time-out values.

12.1 Data In commands

The following are Data In commands:

• Identify Device

• Read Buffer

• Read Long

• Read Multiple

• Read Multiple EXT

• Read Sector(s)

• Read Sector(s) EXT

• S.M.A.R.T. Read Attribute Values

• S.M.A.R.T. Read Attribute Thresholds

• S.M.A.R.T. Read log sector

Execution includes the transfer of one or more 512 byte (> 512 bytes on Read Long) sectors of data from the device to the host.

1. The host writes any required parameters to the Features, Sector Count, LBA, Cylinder, and Device Registers.

2. The host writes the command code to the Command Register.

3. For each sector (or block) of data to be transferred: a. The device sets BSY = 1 and prepares for data transfer.

b. When a sector (or block) of data is available for transfer to the host, the device sets BSY = 0, sets

DRQ = 1, and interrupts the host.

c. In response to the interrupt, the host reads the Status Register.

d. The device clears the interrupt in response to the Status Register being read.

e. The host reads one sector (or block) of data via the Data Register.

f. The device sets DRQ = 0 after the sector (or block) has been transferred to the host.

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification page 91

4. For the Read Long command: a. The device sets BSY = 1 and prepares for data transfer.

b. When the sector of data is available for transfer to the host, the device sets BSY = 0 and DRQ=1 and interrupts the host.

c. In response to the interrupt, the host reads the Status Register.

d. The device clears the interrupt in response to the Status Register being read.

e. The host reads the sector of data including ECC bytes via the Data Register.

f. The device sets DRQ = 0 after the sector has been transferred to the host.

The Read Multiple command transfers one block of data for each interrupt. The other commands transfer one sector of data for each interrupt.

Note that the status data for a sector of data is available in the Status Register before the sector is transferred to the host.

If the device detects an invalid parameter, then it will abort the command by setting BSY = 0, ERR = 1, ABT = 1, and interrupting the host.

If an error occurs, the device will set BSY = 0, ERR = 1, and DRQ = 1. The device will then store the error status in the Error Register and interrupt the host. The registers will contain the location of the sector in error. The error location will be reported using CHS mode or LBA mode. The mode is decided by the mode select bit (bit 6) of the

Device/Head register upon issuing the command.

If an Uncorrectable Data Error (UNC = 1) occurs, the defective data will be transferred from the media to the sector buffer and will be available for transfer to the host at the host's option. In case of a Read Multiple command, the host should complete transfer of the block which includes the error from the sector buffer and terminate whatever type of error that occurred.

All data transfers to the host through the Data Register are 16 bits. The ECC bytes are an exception having only

8 bits.

12.2 Data Out Commands

The following are Data Out commands:

• Device Configuration SET

• Format Track

• Security Disable Password

• Security Erase Unit

• Security Set Password

• Security Unlock

• Set Max SET PASSWORD

• Set Max UNLOCK

• S.M.A.R.T. Write log sector

• Write Buffer

• Write Long

• Write Multiple

• Write Miltiple EXT

• Write Sector(s)

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification page 92

• Write Sector(s) EXT

• Write Verify

Execution includes the transfer of one or more 512 byte (> 512 bytes on Write Long) sectors of data from the host to the device.

1. The host writes any required parameters to the Features, Sector Count, LBA, and Device Registers.

2. The host writes the command code to the Command Register.

3. The device sets BSY = 1.

4. For each sector (or block) of data to be transferred: a. The devics BSY = 0 and DRQ = 1 when it is ready to receive a sector (or block).

b. The host writes one sector (or block) of data via the Data Register.

c. The device sets BSY = 1 after it has received the sector (or block).

d. When the device has finished processing the sector (or block), it sets BSY = 0 and interrupts the host.

e. In response to the interrupt, the host reads the Status Register.

5. For the Write Long Command: a. The device sets BSY = 0 and DRQ = 1 when it is ready to receive a sector.

b. The host writes one sector of data including ECC bytes via the Data Register.

c. The device sets BSY = 1 after it has received the sector.

d. After processing the sector of data the device sets BSY = 0 and interrupts the host.

e. In response to the interrupt, the host reads the Status Register.

f. The device clears the interrupt in response to the Status Register being read.

The Write Multiple command transfers one block of data for each interrupt. The other commands transfer one sector of data for each interrupt.

If the device detects an invalid parameter, then it will abort the command by setting BSY = 0, ERR = 1, ABT = 1, and interrupting the host.

If an uncorrectable error occurs, the device will set BSY = 0 and ERR = 1, store the error status in the Error Register, and interrupt the host. The registers will contain the location of the sector in error. The error location will be reported with CHS mode or LBA mode. The mode is decided by the mode select bit (bit 6) of the Device/Head register on issuing the command.

All data transfers to the host through the Data Register are 16 bits. The ECC bytes are an exception having only

8 bits.

12.3 Non-data commands

The following are Non-data commands:

• Check Power Mode

• Device Configuration FREEZE LOCK

• Device Configuration RESTORE

• Enable/Disable Delayed Write

• Execute Device Diagnostic

• Flush Cache

• Flush Cache EXT

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification page 93

• Format Unit

• Idle

• Idle Immediate

• Initialize Device Parameters

• Read Native Max ADDRESS

• Read Native Max ADDRESS EXT

• Read Verify Sector(s)

• Read Verify Sector(s) EXT

• Recalibrate

• Security Erase Prepare

• Security Freeze Lock

• Seek

• Sense Condition

• Set Features

• Set Max ADDRESS

• Set Max ADDRESS EXT

• Set Max LOCK

• Set Max FREEZE LOCK

• Set Multiple Mode

• Sleep

• S.M.A.R.T. Disable Operations

• S.M.A.R.T. Enable/Disable Attribute Auto save

• S.M.A.R.T. Enable/Disable Automatic Off-line

• S.M.A.R.T. Enable Operations

• S.M.A.R.T. Execute Off-line Immediate

• S.M.A.R.T. Return Status

• S.M.A.R.T. Save Attribute Values

• Standby

• Standby Immediate

Execution of these commands involves no data transfer: a. The host writes any required parameters to the Features, Sector Count,LBA High, LBA Mid, LBA Low, and Device Registers.

b. The host writes the command code to the Command Register.

c. The device sets BSY = 1.

d. When the device has finished processing the command, it sets BSY = 0 and interrupts the host.

e. In response to the interrupt, the host reads the Status Register.

f. The device clears the interrupt in response to the Status Register being read.

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification page 94

12.4 DMA Data Transfer commands:

• Read DMA

• Read DMA EXT

• Write DMA

• Write DMA EXT

Data transfers using DMA commands differ in two ways from PIO transfers:

• Data transfers are performed using the Slave DMA channel

• No intermediate sector interrupts are issued on multisector commands.

Initiation of the DMA transfer commands is identical to the Read Sector or Write Sector commands with one exception: the host initializes the Slave DMA channel prior to issuing the command.

The interrupt handler for DMA transfers differs in two ways:

• No intermediate sector interrupts are issued on multisector commands.

• The host resets the DMA channel prior to reading status from the device

The DMA protocol allows high performance multitasking operating systems to eliminate processor overhead associated with PIO transfers.

1. The host initializes the Slave DMA channel.

2. The host writes any required parameters to the Features, Sector Count, Sector Number, Cylinder, and

Device/Head registers.

3. The host writes command code to the Command Register.

4. The device sets DMARQ when it is ready to transfer any part of the data.

5. The host transfers the data using the DMA transfer protocol currently in effect.

6. When all of the data has been transferred, the device generates an interrupt to the host.

7. The host resets the Slave DMA channel.

8. The host reads the Status Register and, optionally, the Error Register.

Refer to Section 7.0, “Electrical interface specification” on page 39 for further details.

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification page 95

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification page 96

13.0 Command descriptions

The table below shows the commands that are supported by the device. Table 60: “Command Set (subcommand)” on page 99 shows the subcommands that are supported by each command or feature.

Table 58: Command Set (1 of 2)

Protocol

3

3

3

3

1

1

3

3

1

1

4

1

4

4

3

1

2

3

3

2

3

3

2

3

2

3

3

3

3

3

2

3+

1

3

3

1

2

3

3

3

3

Command

Check Power Mode

Check Power Mode*

Device Configuration RESTORE

Device Configuration FREEZE LOCK

Device Configuration IDENTIFY

Device Configuration SET

Execute Device Diagnostic

Flush Cache

Flush Cache EXT

Format Track

Format Unit

Identify Device

Idle

Idle*

Idle Immediate

Idle Immediate*

Initialize Device Parameters

Read Buffer

Read DMA

Read DMA

Read DMA EXT

Read Long

Read Long

Read Multiple

Read Native Max ADDRESS

Read Native Max ADDRESS EXT

Read Sector(s)

Read Sector(s)

Read Sector(s)EXT

Read Verify Sector(s)

Read Verify Sector(s)

Read Verify Sector(s)EXT

Recalibrate

Security Disable Password

Security Erase Prepare

Security Erase Unit

Security Freeze Lock

Security Set Password

Security Unlock

Seek

Sense Condition

Code

(Hex)

24

40

41

42

F8

27

20

21

25

22

23

C4

91

E4

C8

C9

1x

F6

F3

F4

F5

F1

F2

7x

F0

E3

97

E1

95

EA

50

F7

EC

B1

B1

90

E7

E5

98

B1

B1

Binary Code Bit

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1

1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0

1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1

1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1

1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1

1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1

1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0

1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1

1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0

0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0

1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1

1 1 1 0 1 1 0 0

1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1

1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1

1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1

1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1

1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1

1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0

1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0

1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1

0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1

0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0

0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1

1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0

1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0

0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1

0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1

0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0

0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1

0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0

0 0 0 1 - - - -

1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0

1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1

1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0

1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1

1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1

1 1 1 1 0 0 1 0

0 1 1 1 - - - -

1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

97

Table 59: Command Set (2 of 2)

Protocol

Command

2

2

4

2

4

4

3

2

2

2

2

2

2

3

3

2

3

3

3

1

1

3

1

3

3

3

3

3

3

2

3

3

2

3

3

3

3

Set Features

Set Max ADDRESS

Set Max ADDRESS EXT

Set Max FREEZE LOCK

Set Max LOCK

Set Max SET PASSWORD

Set Max UNLOCK

Set Multiple Mode

Sleep

Sleep*

S.M.A.R.T. Disable Operations

S.M.A.R.T. Enable/Disable Attribute Auto save

S.M.A.R.T. Enable/Disable Automatic Off-line

S.M.A.R.T. Enable Operations

S.M.A.R.T. Execute Off-line Immediate

S.M.A.R.T. Read Attribute Values

S.M.A.R.T. Read Attribute Thresholds

S.M.A.R.T. Read Log Sector

S.M.A.R.T. Return Status

S.M.A.R.T. Save Attribute Values

S.M.A.R.T. Write Log Sector

Standby

Standby*

Standby Immediate

Standby Immediate*

Write Buffer

Write DMA

Write DMA

Write DMA EXT

Write Long

Write Long

Write Multiple

Write Multiple EXT

Write Sector(s)

Write Sector(s)

Write Sector(s)EXT

Write Verify

Code

(Hex)

35

32

33

C5

94

E8

CA

CB

39

30

31

34

3C

B0

E2

96

E0

B0

B0

B0

B0

B0

B0

B0

B0

E6

99

B0

B0

F9

F9

F9

C6

EF

F9

37

F9

Binary Code Bit

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1

1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1

0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1

1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1

1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1

1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1

1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1

1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0

1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0

1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1

1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0

1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0

1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0

1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0

1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0

1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0

1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0

1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0

1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0

1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0

1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0

1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0

1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0

1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0

1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0

1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0

1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0

1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1

0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1

0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0

0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1

1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1

0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1

0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0

0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1

0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0

0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0

Commands marked * are alternate command codes for previously defined commands

Protocol: 1 : PIO data IN command 3 : Non data command + : Vendor specific command

2 : PIO data OUT command 4 : DMA command

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

98

Table 60: Command Set (subcommand)

Command (Subcommand)

S.M.A.R.T. Function

S.M.A.R.T. Read Attribute Values

S.M.A.R.T. Read Attribute Thresholds

S.M.A.R.T. Enable/Disable Attribute Autosave

S.M.A.R.T. Save Attribute Values

S.M.A.R.T. Execute Off-line Immediate

S.M.A.R.T. Read Log Sector

S.M.A.R.T. Write Log Sector

S.M.A.R.T. Enable Operations

S.M.A.R.T. Disable Operations

S.M.A.R.T. Return Status

S.M.A.R.T. Enable/Disable Automatic Off-line

Set Features

Enable Write Cache

Set Transfer mode

Enable Advanced Power Management feature

Enable Address Offset mode

40 bytes of ECC apply on Read/Write Long

Disable read look-ahead feature

Disable reverting to power on defaults

Disable write cache

Disable Advanced Power Management feature

Disable Address Offset mode

Enable read look-ahead feature

4 bytes of ECC apply on Read/Write Long

Enable reverting to power on defaults

Set Max Security Extension

Set Max SET PASSWORD

Set Max LOCK

Set Max UNLOCK

Set Max FREEZE LOCK

Device Configuration Overlay

Device Configuration RESTORE

Device Configuration FREEZE LOCK

Device Configuration IDENTIFY

Device Configuration SET

EF

EF

EF

EF

EF

EF

EF

EF

EF

EF

EF

EF

EF

Command

Code (Hex)

Feature

Register (Hex)

B0

B0

B0

B0

B0

B0

B0

B0

B0

B0

B0

D4

D5

D6

D8

D0

D1

D2

D3

D9

DA

DB

F9

F9

F9

F9

B1

B1

B1

B1

82

85

89

AA

BB

CC

02

03

05

09

44

55

66

01

02

03

04

CO

C1

C2

C3

The "Command set" table beginning on page page 97 shows the commands that are supported by the device. The

"Command Set (Subcommand)" table above shows the sub-commands that are supported by each command or feature.

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

99

The following symbols are used in the command descriptions.

Input registers

0

1

H

V

N

-

This indicates that the bit is always set to 0.

This indicates that the bit is always set to 1.

Head number. This indicates that the head number part of the Device/Head Register is an input parameter and will be set by the device.

Valid. This indicates that the bit is part of an input parameter and will be set by the device to 0 or 1.

Not recommended condition for start up. Indicates that the condition of the device is not recommended for start up.

This indicates that the bit is not part of an input parameter.symbols are used in the command descriptions:

Output registers

0

1

D

H

L

R

B

V x

-

This indicates that the bit must be set to 0.

This indicates that the bit must be set to 1.

The device number bit. This indicates that the device number bit of the Device Register should be specified. Zero selects the master device and one selects the slave device.

Head number. This indicates that the head number part of the Device/Head Register is an output parameter and should be specified.

LBA mode. This indicates the addressing mode. Zero specifies CHS mode and one specifies LBA addressing mode.

Retry. Original meaning is already obsolete, there is no difference between 0 and 1. (Using 0 is recommended for future compatibility.)

Option Bit. This indicates that the Option Bit of the Sector Count Register be specified. (This bit is used by Set

Max ADDRESS command.)

Valid. This indicates that the bit is part of an output parameter and should be specified.

This indicates that the hex character is not used.

This indicates that the bit is not used.

The command descriptions show the contents of the Status and Error Registers after the device has completed processing the command and has interrupted the host.

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

100

13.1 Check Power Mode (E5h/98h)

Table 61: Check Power Mode Commmand (E5h/98h)

Command Block Output Registers

Register

Data

Feature

Sector Count

LBA Low

LBA Mid

LBA High

Device

Command

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

1 - 1 D - - - -

1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1

Error Register

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

CRC UNC 0 IDN 0 ABT T0N AMN

0 0 0 0 0 V 0 0

Command Block Input Registers

Register

Data

Error

Sector Count

LBA Low

LBA Mid

LBA High

Device

Status

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

- - - - - - - see below

V V V V V V V V

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - see below

Status Register

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

BSY RDY DF DSC DRQ COR IDX ERR

0 0 0 0 V

The Check Power Mode command will report whether the device is spun up and the media is available for immediate access.

Input parameters from the device

Sector Count This indicates the power mode code. The command returns FFh in the Sector Count Register if the spindle motor is at speed and the device is not in Standby or Sleep mode. Otherwise, the Sector Count Register is set to 0.

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

101

13.2 Device Configuration Overlay (B1h)

Table 62: Check Power Mode Command (E5h/98h)

Command Block Output Registers

Register

Data

Feature

Sector Count

LBA Low

LBA Mid

LBA High

Device

Command

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

- - - - - - - -

1 0 1 0 V V V V

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - D - - - -

1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1

Command Block Input Registers

Register

Data

Error

Sector Count

LBA Low

LBA Low

LBA High

Device

Status

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

- - - - - - - see below

V V V V V V V V

- - - - - - - -

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

- - - - - - - see below

Error Register

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

CRC UNC 0 IDN 0 ABT T0N AMN

0 0 0 0 0 V 0 0

Status Register

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

BSY RDY DF DSC DRQ COR IDX ERR

V V 0 V V

Individual Device Configuration Overlay feature set commands are identified by the value placed in the Features register. The table below shows these Features register values.

Table 63: Device Configuration Overlay Features register values

Value

C0h

C1h

C2h

C3h other

Command

DEVICE CONFIGURATION RESTORE

DEVICE CONFIGURATION FREEZE LOCK

DEVICE CONFIGURATION IDENTIFY

DEVICE CONFIGURATION SET

Reserved

13.2.1 DEVICE CONFIGURATION RESTORE (subcommand C0h)

The DEVICE CONFIGURATION RESTORE command disables any setting previously made by a DEVICE

CONFIGURATION SET command and returns the content of the IDENTIFY DEVICE or IDENTIFY PACKET

DEVICE command response to the original settings as indicated by the data returned from the execution of a

DEVICE CONFIGURATION IDENTIFY command.

13.2.2 DEVICE CONFIGURATION FREEZE LOCK (subcommand C1h)

The DEVICE CONFIGURATION FREEZE LOCK command prevents accidental modification of the Device Configuration Overlay settings. After successful execution of a DEVICE CONFIGURATION FREEZE LOCK command, all DEVICE CONFIGURATION SET, DEVICE CONFIGURATION FREEZE LOCK, DEVICE

CONFIGURATION IDENTIFY, and DEVICE CONFIGURATION RESTORE commands are aborted by the device. The DEVICE CONFIGURATION FREEZE LOCK condition shall be cleared by a power-down. The

DEVICE CONFIGURATION FREEZE LOCK condition shall not be cleared by hardware or software reset.

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

102

13.2.3 DEVICE CONFIGURATION IDENTIFY (subcommand C2h)

The DEVICE CONFIGURATION IDENTIFY command returns a 512 byte data structure via PIO data-in transfer.

The content of this data structure indicates the selectable commands, modes, and feature sets that the device is capable of supporting. If a DEVICE CONFIGURATION SET command has been issued reducing the capabilities, the response to an IDENTIFY DEVICE or IDENTIFY PACKET DEVICE command will reflect the reduced set of capabilities, while the DEVICE CONFIGURATION IDENTIFY command will reflect the entire set of selectable capabilities.

The format of the Device Configuration Overlay data structure is shown in Table 64: “Device Configuration Overlay Data structure” on page 104.

13.2.4 DEVICE CONFIGURATION SET (subcommand C3h)

The DEVICE CONFIGURATION SET command allows a device manufacturer or a personal computer system manufacturer to reduce the set of optional commands, modes, or feature sets supported by a device as indicated by a DEVICE CONFIGURATION IDENTIFY command. The DEVICE CONFIGURATION SET command transfers an overlay that modifies some of the bits set in words 63, 82, 83, 84, and 88 of the IDENTIFY DEVICE command response. When the bits in these words are cleared, the device no longer supports the indicated command, mode, or feature set. If a bit is set in the overlay transmitted by the device that is not set in the overlay received from a

DEVICE CONFIGURATION IDENTIFY command, no action is taken for that bit.

The format of the overlay transmitted by the device is described in the table in Table 64: “Device Configuration

Overlay Data structure” on page 104. The restrictions on changing these bits is described in the text following that

table. If any of the bit modification restrictions described are violated or any setting is changed with DEVICE

CONFIGURATION SET command, the device shall return command aborted. In that case, error reason code is returned to sector count register, invalid word location is returned to LBA high register, and invalid bit location is

returned to LBA Mid register. The Definition of error information is shown in Table 65: “DCO error information definition.” on page 104.

ERROR INFORMATION EXAMPLE 1:

After establishing a protected area with SET MAX address, if a user attempts to change maximum LBA address

(DC SET or DC RESTORE), the device aborts that command and returns error reason code as below.

LBA High

LBA Mid

Sector count

: 03h = word 3 is invalid

: 00h this register is not assigned in this case

: 06h = Protected area is now established

ERROR INFORMATION EXAMPLE 2:

When the device is enabled and the Security feature is set, if the user attempts to disable that feature, the device aborts that command and returns an error reason code as below.

LBA High

LBA Mid

Sector count

: 07h = word 7 is invalid

: 03h = bit 3 is invalid

: 04h = now Security feature set is enabled

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

103

Table 64: Device Configuration Overlay Data structure

Word Content

0

1

2

0001h Data Structure revision

Multiword DMA modes supported

15-3 Reserved

2 1 = Multiword DMA mode 2 and below are supported

1 1 = Multiword DMA mode 1 and below are supported

0 1 = Multiword DMA mode 0 is supported

Ultra DMA modes supported

15-6 Reserved

5 1 = Ultra DMA mode 5 and below are supported

4 1 = Ultra DMA mode 4 and below are supported

3 1 = Ultra DMA mode 3 and below are supported

2 1 = Ultra DMA mode 2 and below are supported

1 1 = Ultra DMA mode 1 and below are supported

0 1 = Ultra DMA mode 0 is supported

Maximum LBA address

Command set/feature set supported

3-6

7

15-8 Reserved

7 1 = Host Protected Area feature set supported

6-4 Reserved

3 1 = Security feature set supported

2 1 = SMART error log supported

1 1 = SMART self-test supported

0 1 = SMART feature set supported

8-254 Reserved

255 Integrity word See note below

15-8 Checksum

7-0 Signature (A5h)

Note: Bits 7–0 of this word contain the value A5h. Bits 15–8 of this word contain the data structure checksum. The data structure checksum is the two's complement of the sum of all byte in words 0through 254 and the byte consisting of bits 7–0 of word 255. Each byte is added with unsigned arithmetic, and overflow is ignored. The sum of all bytes is zero when the checksum is correct.

Table 65: DCO error information definition.

LBA High

LBA Mid

Sector count

05h

06h

07h

08h

FFh invalid word location invalid bit location (bits 7:0) error reason code & description (bits 15:8)

01h

02h

03h

04h

DCO feature is frozen

Device is now Security Locked mode

Device's feature is already modified with DCO

User attempt to disable any feature enabled

Device is now SET MAX Locked or Frozen mode

Protected area is now established

DCO is not supported

Subcommand code is invalid other reason

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

104

13.3 Execute Device Diagnostic (90h)

Table 66: Execute Device Diagnostic command (90h)

Command Block Output Registers

Register

Data

Feature

Sector Count

LBA Low

LBA Mid

LBA High

Device

Command

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

1 - 1 - - - - -

1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0

Command Block Input Registers

Register

Data

Error

Sector Count

LBA Low

LBA Mid

LBA High

Device

Status

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

- - - - - - - see below

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - see below

Error Register

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

CRC UNC 0 IDN 0 ABT T0N AMN

0 V V V V V V V

Status Register

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

BSY RDY DF DSC DRQ COR IDX ERR

0 0 0 0 0

The Execute Device Diagnostic command performs the internal diagnostic tests implemented by the device. The results of the test are stored in the Error Register.

The normal Error Register bit definitions do not apply to this command. Instead, the register contains a diagnostic

code. See Table 45: “Default Register Values” on page 70 for the definition.

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

105

13.4 Flush Cache (E7h)

Table 67: Flush Cache command (E7h)

Command Block Output Registers

Register

Data

Feature

Sector Count

LBA Low

LBA Mid

LBA High

Device

Command

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

1 - 1 D - - - -

1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1

Error Register

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

CRC UNC 0 IDN 0 ABT T0N AMN

0 0 0 0 0 V 0 0

Command Block Input Registers

Register

Data

Error

Sector Count

LBA Low

LBA Mid

LBA High

Device

Status

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

- - - - - - - see below

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - see below

Status Register

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

BSY RDY DF DSC DRQ COR IDX ERR

0 V 0 V 0 V

This command causes the device to complete writing data from its cache.

The device returns a status of RDY = 1 and DSC = 1 (50h) after the following sequence:

• Data in the write cache buffer is written to the disk media.

• Return a successful completion

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

106

13.5 Flush Cache EXT (EAh)

Table 68: Flush Cache command (E7h)

Command Block Output Registers

Register

Data Low

Data High

Feature

Sector

Count

LBA Low

LBA Mid

Current

Previous

Current

Previous

Current

Previous

Current

Previous

LBA High

Current

Previous

Device/Head

Command

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - D - - - -

1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0

Error Register

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

CRC UNC 0 IDN 0 ABT T0N AMN

0 0 0 0 0 V 0 0

Command Block Input Registers

Register

Data Low

Data High

Error

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - see below

Sector

Count

LBA Low

LBA Mid

LBA High

HOB=0

HOB=1

HOB=0

HOB=1

HOB=0

HOB=1

HOB=0

HOB=1

Device/Head

Status

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

See below ...

Status Register

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

BSY RDY DF DSC DRQ COR IDX ERR

0 V 0 V 0 V

This command causes the device to complete writing data from its cache.

The device returns good status after data in the write cache is written to disk media.

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

107

13.6 Format Track (50h: vendor specific)

Table 69: Format Track command (50h)

Command Block Output Registers

Register

Data

Feature

Sector Count

LBA Low

LBA Mid

LBA High

Device

Command

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

1 L 1 D H H H H

0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0

Command Block Input Registers

Register

Data

Error

Sector Count

LBA Low

LBA Mid

LBA High

Device

Status

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

- - - - - - - see below

- - - - - - - -

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

- - - - H H H H see below

Error Register

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

CRC UNC 0 IDN 0 ABT T0N AMN

0 0 0 V 0 V 0 0

Status Register

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

BSY RDY DF DSC DRQ COR IDX ERR

0 V V V 0 V

The Format Track command formats a single logical track on the device. Each good sector of data on the track will be initialized to zero with the write operation. At this time, the read operation does not verify the correct initialization of the data sector. Any data previously stored on the track will be lost.

Output parameters to the device

LBA Low In LBA mode this register specifies that LBA address bits 0–7 are to be formatted. (L=1).

LBA High/Mid

H

This indicates the cylinder number of the track to be formatted. (L = 0)

In LBA mode this register specifies that LBA address bits 8–15 (Mid) and bits 16–23

(High) are to be formatted. (L = 1)

This indicates the head number of the track to be formatted (L = 0). In LBA mode this register specifies that LBA address bits 24–27 are to be formatted. (L= 1)

Input parameters from the device

LBA Low

LBA High/Mid

H

In LBA mode this register specifies the current LBA address bits as 0–7 (L = 1).

In LBA mode this register specifies the current LBA address bits as 8–15 (Mid) and bits

16–23 (High).

In LBA mode this register specifies the current LBA address bits as 24–27 (L=1).

In LBA mode this command formats a single logical track including the specified LBA.

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

108

13.7 Format Unit (F7h: vendor specific)

Table 70: Format Unit command (F7h)

Command Block Output Registers

Register

Data

Feature

Sector Count

LBA Low

LBA Mid

LBA High

Device

Command

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

- - - - - - - -

V V V V V V V V

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

1 - 1 D - - - -

1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1

Command Block Input Registers

Register

Data

Error

Sector Count

LBA Low

LBA Mid

LBA High

Device

Status

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

- - - - - - - see below

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - - see below

Error Register

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

CRC UNC 0 IDN 0 ABT T0N AMN

0 0 0 V 0 V 0 0

Status Register

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

BSY RDY DF DSC DRQ COR IDX ERR

0 V 0 V 0 V

The Format Unit command initializes all user data sectors after merging the reassigned sector location into the defect information of the device and clearing the reassign information. Both new reassign information and new defect information are available immediately after the completion of this command. They are also used on the next power on reset or hard reset. This command erases both previous information data from the device.

Note that the Format Unit command initializes from LBA 0 to Native MAX LBA. Host MAX LBA is set by Initialize Drive Parameter or Set MAX ADDRESS command is ignored. The protected area by Set MAX ADDRESS command is also initialized.

The Security Erase Prepare command should be completed immediately prior to the Format Unit command. If the device receives a Format Unit command without a prior Security Erase Prepare command, the device aborts the

Format Unit command.

If the Feature register is NOT 11h, the device returns an Abort error to the host.

This command does not request a data transfer.

Output parameters to the device

Feature

11H

This indicates the Destination code for this command

The merge reassigned location into the defect information.

The execution time of this command is shown below.

Model number

IC25N080ATMR04-0

IC25N060ATMR04-0

IC25N040ATMR04-0

IC25N030ATMR04-0

IC25N020ATMR04-0

Execution time

66

50

34

26

18

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

109

13.8 Identify Device (ECh)

Table 71: Identify Device command (ECh)

Command Block Output Registers

Register

Data

Feature

Sector Count

LBA Low

LBA Mid

LBA High

Device

Command

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

1 - 1 D - - - -

1 1 1 0 1 1 0 0

Error Register

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

CRC UNC 0 IDN 0 ABT T0N AMN

0 0 0 0 0 V 0 0

Command Block Input Registers

Register

Data

Error

Sector Count

LBA Low

LBA Mid

LBA High

Device

Status

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

- - - - - - - see below

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - - see below

Status Register

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

BSY RDY DF DSC DRQ COR IDX ERR

0 V 0 0 V

The Identify Device command requests the device to transfer configuration information to the host. The device will

transfer a sector to the host containing the information in Table 72 beginning on page 111.

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

110

Table 72: Identify device information. (Part 1 of 7)

Word Content Description

00

01

02

03

04-05

06

07-09

10-19

20

045AH

(Note 1) xxxxH

(Note 1)

0

003FH

0

XXXX

0003H

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

* drive classification

15(=0)

14(=0)

13(=0)

12(=0)

11(=0)

10(=1)

9(=0)

8(=0)

7(=0)

6(=1)

5(=0)

4(=1)

3(=1)

2(=0)

1(=1)

0(=0) bit assignments

1=ATAPI device, 0=ATA device

1=format speed tolerance gap required

1=track offset option available

1=data strobe offset option available

1=rotational speed tolerance > 0.5%

1=disk transfer rate > 10 Mbps

1=disk transfer rate > 5 Mbps but <= 10 Mbps

1=disk transfer rate <= 5 Mbps

1=removable cartridge drive

1=fixed drive

1=spindle motor control option implemented

1=head switch time > 15 ms

1=not MFM encoded

1=identify data incomplete

1=hard sectored

Reserved

Number of cylinders in default translate mode

Specific configuration

C837h

37C8h

SET FEATURES subcommand is not required to spin-up and IDENTIFY DEVICE response is complete

SET FEATURES subcommand is required to spin-up and

IDENTIFY DEVICE response is complete

Number of heads in default translate mode

* Reserved

Number of sectors per track in default translate mode

Reserved

*

Serial number in ASCII (0 = not specified)

Controller type:

0003: dual ported, multiple sector buffer with look-ahead read

21

22

23-26 XXXX

27-46 (Note 1)

47

(Note 1) * Buffer size in 512-byte increments

00XXH

*

Number of ECC bytes as currently selected via the set feature command

8010H

Micro code version in ASCII

Model number in ASCII

Maximum number of sectors that can be transferred per interrupt on Read and Write Multiple commands

15-8: (=80h)

7-0: Maximum number of sectors that can be transferred per interrupt.

* indicates the use of those parameters that are vendor specific.

Note 1. See Table 79: “Number of cylinders/heads/sectors by model.” on page 118.

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

111

Table 73: Identify device information. (Part 2 of 7)

Word Content Description

48

49

50

51

52

53

0000H

0F00H

* Capable of double word I/O, '0000'= cannot perform

*

Capabilities, bit assignments:

15-14(=0) Reserved

13(=0) Standby timer value are vendor specific

12(=0) Reserved

11(=1) IORDY Supported

10(=1) IORDY can be disabled

9(=1) Reserved

8(=0) Reserved

7-0(=0) Reserved

4000H Capabilities

15(=0) 0=the contents of word 50 are valid

14(=1) 1=the contents of word 50 are valid

13- 1(=0) Reserved

0(=0) 1=the device has a minimum Standby timer value that

is device specific

0200H * PIO data transfer cycle timing mode

0200H * DMA data transfer cycle timing mode Refer Word 62 and 63

0007H Validity flag of the word

15- 3(=0) Reserved

2(=1) 1 Word 88 is Valid

1(=1) 1=Word 64-70 are Valid

0(=1) 1=Word 54-58 are Valid

54

55

56

57-58

XXXXH

XXXXH

XXXXH

XXXXH

Number of current cylinders

Number of current heads

Number of current sectors per track

Current capacity in sectors

Word 57 specifies the low word of the capacity

59

60-61

62

63

0XXXH

(Note 1)

Current Multiple setting. Bit assignments:

15- 9(=0) Reserved

8 1= Multiple Sector Setting is Valid

7- 0 xxh = Current setting for number of sectors

Total Number of User Addressable Sectors

Word 60 specifies the low word of the number

FFFFFFFh=the 48-bit native max address is greater than

268,435,455

0000H * Reserved

0X07H Multiword DMA Transfer Capability

15-11 (=0) Reserved

10 1=Multiword DMA mode 2 is selected

9 1=Multiword DMA mode 1 is selected

8 1=Multiword DMA mode 0 is selected

7- 3 (=0) Reserved

2 1=Multiword DMA mode 2 is supported

1 1=Multiword DMA mode 1 is supported

0 1=Multiword DMA mode 0 is supported

* indicates the use of those parameters that are vendor specific.

Note 1. See Table 79: “Number of cylinders/heads/sectors by model.” on page 118.

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

112

Table 74: Identify device information. (Part 3 of 7)

Word

64

65

66

67

68

69-79

80

81

82

Content Description

0003H Flow Control PIO Transfer Modes Supported

15- 8(=0) Reserved

7- 0(=3) Advanced PIO Transfer Modes Supported

'11' = PIO Mode 3 and 4 Supported

0078H Minimum Multiword DMA Transfer Cycle Time Per Word

15- 0(=78h) Cycle time in nanoseconds (120 ns, 16.6 MB/s)

0078H Manufacturer's Recommended Multiword DMA Transfer Cycle Time

15- 0(=78h) Cycle time in nanoseconds (120 ns, 16.6 MB/s)

00F0H Minimum PIO Transfer Cycle Time Without Flow Control 15- 0(=F0h)

Cycle time in nanoseconds (240 ns, 8.3 MB/s)

0078H Minimum PIO Transfer Cycle Time With IORDY Flow Control 15-

0(=78h) Cycle time in nanoseconds (120 ns, 16.6 MB/s)

0000H Reserved

007C Major version number - ATA-1,2,3 and ATA/ATAPI-4,5,6

0019 Minor version number - ATA/ATAPI-6 T13 1410D Revision 3a

746BH Command set supported

15(=0) Reserved

14(=1) 1=NOP command supported

13(=1) 1=READ BUFFER command supported

12(=1) 1=WRITE BUFFER command supported

11(=0) Reserved

**10(=1) 1=Host Protected Area Feature Set supported

9(=0) 1=DEVICE RESET command supported

8(=0) 1=SERVICE interrupt supported

7(=0) 1=release interrupt supported

6(=1) 1=look-ahead supported

5(=1) 1=write cache supported

4(=0) 1=supports PACKET Command Feature Set

3(=1) 1=supports Power Management Feature Set

2(=0) 1=supports Removable Media Feature Set

** 1(=1) 1=supports Security Feature Set

** 0(=1) 1=supports S.M.A.R.T. Feature Set

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

113

Table 75: Identify device information. (Part 4 of 7)

Word

83

84

85

Content Description

7FE8H Command set supported

15(=0) Always

*

14(=1) Always

13(=1) 1=FLUSH CACEH EXT command supported

12(=1) 1=FLUSH CACHE command supported

11(=1) 1=Device Configuration Overlay command supported

10(=1) 1=48-bit Address feature set supported

9(=1) 1=Automatic Acoustic Management supported

** 8(=1) 1=SET MAX security extension supported

** 7(=1) 1=Address Offset feature supported

6(=1) 1=SET FEATURES subcommand required to spin-up

5(=1) 1=Power-Up In Standby feature set supported

4(=0) 1=Removable Media Status Notification Feature Set

supported

3(=1) 1=Advanced Power Management Feature Set supported

2(=0) 1=CFA Feature Set supported

1(=0) 1=READ/WRITE DMA QUEUED supported

0(=0) 1=DOWNLOAD MICROCODE command supported

4023H Command set/feature supported extension

15(=0) Always

14(=1) Always

13- 6(=0) Reserved

5(=1) 1=General Purpose Logging feature set supported

4-2(=0) Reserved

** 1(=1) 1=SMART self-test supported

** 0(=1) 1=SMART error logging supported

F4XXH Command set/feature enabled

15(=1) Reserved

14(=1) 1=NOP command supported

13(=1) 1=READ BUFFER command supported

12(=1) 1=WRITE BUFFER command supported

11(=0) Reserved

**10(=1) 1=Host Protected Area Feature Set supported

9(=0) 1=DEVICE RESET command supported

8(=0) 1=SERVICE interrupt enabled

7(=0) 1=release interrupt enabled

6(=X) 1=look-ahead enabled

5(=X) 1=write cache enabled

4(=0) 1=supports PACKET Command Feature Set

3(=X) 1=supports Power Management Feature Set

2(=0) 1=supports Removable Media Feature Set

1(=X) 1=Security Feature Set enabled

0(=X) 1=S.M.A.R.T. Feature Set enabled

* indicates the use of those parameters that are vendor specific.

** indicates a feature that is able to be unsupported by the Device Configuration Overlay command.

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

114

Table 76: Identify device information. (Part 5 of 7

Word

86

87

88

89

90

Content

0XXXH

4023H

XX3FH

XXXXH

0000H

Description

Command set/feature enabled

* 15-14(=0) Reserved

*

*

13(=1) 1=FLUSH CACHE EXT command supported

12(=1) 1=FLUSH CACHE command supported

11(=x) 1=Device Configuration Overlay supported

10(=1) 1=48-bit Address feature set supported

9(=X) 1=Automatic Acoustic Management enabled

8(=X) 1=SET MAX security extension enabled

7(=X) 1=Address Offset mode enabled

6(=1) 1=SET FEATURES subcommand required to spin-up

5(=X) 1=Power-Up In Standby feature set has been

enabled via the SET FEATURES command

4(=0) 1=Removable Media Status Notification Feature Set

enabled

3(=X) 1=Advanced Power management Feature Set enabled

2(=0) 1=CFA Feature Set supported

1(=0) 1=READ/WRITE DMA QUEUED command supported

0(=0) 1=DOWNLOAD MICROCODE command supported

Command set/feature enabled

15(=0) Always

14(=1) Always

13-6(=0) Reserved

5(=1) 1=General Purpose Logging feature set supported

4-2(=0) Reserved

1(=1) 1=SMART self-test supported

0(=1) 1=SMART error logging supported

Ultra DMA Transfer mode (mode 5 supported)

15-14(=0) Reserved

13(=X) 1=UltraDMA mode 5 is selected

12(=X) 1=UltraDMA mode 4 is selected

11(=X) 1=UltraDMA mode 3 is selected

10(=X) 1=UltraDMA mode 2 is selected

9(=X) 1=UltraDMA mode 1 is selected

8(=X) 1=UltraDMA mode 0 is selected

7- 6(=0) Reserved

**5(=1) 1=UltraDMA mode 5 is selected

**4(=1) 1=UltraDMA mode 4 is supported

**3(=1) 1=UltraDMA mode 3 is supported

**2(=1) 1=UltraDMA mode 2 is supported

**1(=1) 1=UltraDMA mode 1 is supported

0(=1) 1=UltraDMA mode 0 is supported

Time required for security erase unit completion

Time= value (XXXXh)*2 [minutes]

Time required for Enhanced security erase completion

0000 : Not supported

* indicates the use of those parameters that are vendor specific.

** indicates a feature that is able to be unsupported by the Device Configuration Overlay command.

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

115

Table 77: Identify device information. (Part 6 of 7)

Word

91

92

93

94

Content Description

40XXH Current Advanced Power Management level

15- 8(=40h) Reserved

7- 0(=xxh) Current Advanced Power Management level set by

Set Features Command (01h to FEh)

XXXXH Current Master Password Revision Codes

XXXXH Hardware reset results

15-13 Device detected result

15(=0) Reserved

14(=1) Always

13(=X) 1=Device detected CBLID- above ViH

0=Device detected CBLID- below ViL

12- 8 Device 1 hardware reset result

Device 0 clear these bits to 0

12(=0) Reserved

11(=X) 1=Device 1 passed diagnostic

10-9(=X) How Device 1 determined the device number:

00= Reserved

01= a jumper was used

10= the CSEL signal was used

11= some other method used or method unknown

8(=1) Always

7- 0 Device 0 hardware reset result

Device 1 clears these bits to 0

7(=0) Reserved

6(=X) 1=Semi-duplex mode is enabled

5(=X) 1=Device 0 detected Device 1

4(=X) 1=Device 1 passed diagnostic

3(=X) 1=Device 0 passed diagnostic

2-1(=X) how Device 0 determined the device number:

00=Reserved

01=a jumper was used

10=the CSEL signal was used

11=some other method used or the method unknown

0(=1) Always

80XXH Automatic Acoustic Management value

15- 8 Vendor’s Recommended Acoustic Management level

7- 0 Current Automatic Acoustic Management level

Default value if FEh

0000H Reserved 94-99

100-

103

104-

126

127

Note 1

0000H

0000H

Maximum user LBA address for 48-bit Address feature set

Reserved

Removable Media Status Notification feature set

Note 1. See Table 79: “Number of cylinders/heads/sectors by model.” on page 118.

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

116

Table 78: Identify device information. (Part 7 of 7)

Word

128

Content

0XXXH

129

130

131

000XH

XXXXH

000XH

XXXXH

Description

Security Mode Feature. Bit assignments

15-9(=0) Reserved

8(=X) Security Level: 1= Maximum, 0= High

7-6(=0) Reserved

5(=0) 1=Enhanced security erase supported

4(=0) 1=Security count expired

3(=0) 1=Security Frozen

2(=0) 1=Security Locked

1(=0) 1=Security Enabled

**0(=0) 1=Security Support

* Current Set Feature Option. Bit assignments

15-4(=0) Reserved

3(=X) 1=Auto reassign enabled

2(=X) 1=Reverting enabled

1(=X) 1=Read Look-ahead enabled

0(=X) 1=Write Cache enabled

* Reserved

* Initial Power Mode Selection. Bit assignments

15-2(=0) Reserved

1(=1) Always

0(=X) Initial Power Mode: 1=Standby, 0=Idle

* Reserved 132-

254

255 XXA5H Integrity word

15-8(=XXh) Checksum

7-0(=A5h) Signature

* indicates the use of those parameters that are vendor specific.

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

117

Table 79: Number of cylinders/heads/sectors by model.

Microcode revision MRxOAxxx

IC25N080ATMR04-0

Number of cylinders

Number of heads

Buffer size

Total number of user addressable sectors

IC25N060ATMR04-0

Number of cylinders

Number of heads

Buffer size

Total number of user addressable sectors

3FFFh

10h

3D98h (=7,884KB)

950F8B0h

3FFFh

10h

3D98h(=7,884KB)

6FC7C80h

IC25N040ATMR04-0

Number of cylinders

Number of heads

Buffer size

Total number of user addressable sectors

IC25N030ATMR04-0

Number of cylinders

Number of heads

Buffer size

Total number of user addressable sectors

IC25N020ATMR04-0

Number of cylinders

Number of heads

Buffer size

Total number of user addressable sectors

3FFFh

10h

D98h (=1,740KB)

4A8530h

3FFFh

10h

D98h (=1,740KB)

37E3E40h

3FFFh

10h

D98h (=1,740KB)

25429800h

For the microcode revision refer to word 23-26 in 13.8 “Identify Device (ECh)” on page 110. This is

8 characters in ASCII.

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

118

13.9 Idle (E3h/97h)

Table 80: Idle command (E3h/97h)

Command Block Output Registers

Register

Data

Feature

Sector Count

LBA Low

LBA Mid

LBA High

Device

Command

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - -

V V V V V V V V

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

1 - 1 D - - - -

1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1

Error Register

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

CRC UNC 0 IDN 0 ABT T0N AMN

0 0 0 0 0 V 0 0

Command Block Input Registers

Register

Data

Error

Sector Count

LBA Low

LBA Mid

LBA High

Device

Status

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

- - - - - - - see below

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - - see below

Status Register

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

BSY RDY DF DSC DRQ COR IDX ERR

0 V 0 V 0 V

When the power save mode is Standby mode, the Idle command causes the device to enter Performance Idle mode immediately and sets the auto power down time-out Parameter (standby timer). At the set of the auto power down time-out parameter (standby timer) the point timer starts counting down. When the power save mode is already any idle mode, the device remains in that mode.

When the Idle mode is entered, the device is spun up to operating speed. If the device is already spinning, the spin up sequence is not executed.

During Idle mode the device is spinning and is ready to respond to host commands immediately.

Input parameters to the device

Sector Count This indicates the Time-out Parameter. If it is zero, the time-out interval (Standby Timer) is NOT disabled and the time-out interval is set automatically for 109 minutes. If it is other than zero, the time-out interval is set for (Time-out Parameter × 5) seconds.

The device will enter Standby mode automatically if the time-out interval expires with no device access from the host. The time-out interval will be reinitialized if there is a device access before the time-out interval expires.

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

119

13.10 Idle Immediate (E1h/95h)

Table 81: Idle Immediate command (E1h/95h)

Command Block Output Registers

Register

Data

Feature

Sector Count

LBA Low

LBA Mid

LBA High

Device

Command

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

1 - 1 D - - - -

1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1

Error Register

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

CRC UNC 0 IDN 0 ABT T0N AMN

0 0 0 0 0 V 0 0

Command Block Input Registers

Register

Data

Error

Sector Count

LBA Low

LBA Mid

LBA High

Device

Status

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

- - - - - - - see below

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - - see below

Status Register

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

BSY RDY DF DSC DRQ COR IDX ERR

0 V 0 V 0 V

The Idle Immediate command causes the device to enter Performance Idle mode.

The device is spun up to operating speed. If the device is already spinning, the spin up sequence is not executed.

During Idle mode the device is spinning and ready to respond to the host commands immediately.

The Idle Immediate command will not affect the auto power down time-out parameter.

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

120

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

121

13.11 Initialize Device Parameters (91h)

Table 82: Initialize Device Parameters command (91h)

Command Block Output Registers

Register

Data

Feature

Sector Count

LBA Low

LBA Mid

LBA High

Device

Command

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

V V V V V V V V

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

1 - 1 D H H H H

1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1

Command Block Input Registers

Register

Data

Error

Sector Count

LBA Low

LBA Mid

LBA High

Device

Status

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - - see below

Error Register

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

CRC UNC 0 IDN 0 ABT T0N AMN

0 0 0 0 0 V 0 0

Status Register

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

BSY RDY DF DSC DRQ COR IDX ERR

0 0 0 0 V

The Initialize Device Parameters command enables the host to set the number of sectors per track and the number of heads minus 1, per cylinder. Words 54–58 in Identify Device Information reflects these parameters.

The parameters remain in effect until the following events occur:

• Another Initialize Device Parameters command is received.

• The device is powered off.

• A hard reset occurs.

• A soft reset occurs and the Set Feature option of CCh is set.

Output parameters to the device

Sector Count

H

This indicates the number of sectors per track. Zero (0) indicates 0 sectors per track instead of 256 sectors per track. It means that there are no sectors per track.

This indicates the number of heads minus 1 per cylinder. The minimum is 0 and the maximum is 15.

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

122

13.12 Read Buffer (E4h)

Table 83: Read Buffer (E4h)

Command Block Output Registers

Register

Data

Feature

Sector Count

LBA Low

LBA Mid

LBA High

Device

Command

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

1 - 1 D - - - -

1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0

Error Register

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

CRC UNC 0 IDN 0 ABT T0N AMN

0 0 0 0 0 V 0 0

Command Block Input Registers

Register

Data

Error

Sector Count

LBA Low

LBA Mid

LBA High

Device

Status

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

- - - - - - - see below

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - - see below

Status Register

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

BSY RDY DF DSC DRQ COR IDX ERR

0 V 0 0 V

The Read Buffer command transfers a sector of data from the sector buffer of the device to the host.

The sector is transferred through the Data Register 16 bits at a time.

The sector transferred will be from the same part of the buffer written to by the last Write Buffer command. The contents of the sector may be different if any reads or writes have occurred since the Write Buffer command was issued.

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

123

13.13 Read DMA (C8h/C9h)

Table 84: Read DMA command (C8h/C9h)

Command Block Output Registers

Register

Data

Feature

Sector Count

LBA Low

LBA Mid

LBA High

Device

Command

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

1 L 1 D H H H H

1 1 0 0 1 0 0 R

Error Register

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

CRC UNC 0 IDN 0 ABT T0N AMN

0 0 0 0 0 V 0 0

Command Block Input Registers

Register

Data

Error

Sector Count

LBA Low

LBA Mid

LBA High

Device

Status

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

- - - - - - - see below

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

- - - - - H H H H see below

Status Register

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

BSY RDY DF DSC DRQ COR IDX ERR

0 V 0 0 V

The Read DMA command reads one or more sectors of data from disk media and then transfers the data from the device to the host. It transfers the sectors through the Data Register 16 bits at a time.

The host initializes a slave-DMA channel prior to issuing the command. The data transfers are qualified by the

DMARQ and are performed by the slave-DMA channel. The device issues only one interrupt per command to indicate that the data transfer has terminated and that status is available.

If an uncorrectable error occurs, the read will be terminated at the failing sector.

Output parameters to the device

Sector Count This indicates the number of continuous sectors to be transferred. If zero is specified,

256 sectors will be transferred.

LBA Low

LBA High/Mid

This indicates the sector number of the first sector to be transferred. (L = 0).

In LBA mode, this register specifies that LBA address bits 0–7 are to be transferred

(L = 1)

This indicates the cylinder number of the first sector to be transferred. (L = 0).

H

R

In LBA mode this register specifies LBA address bits 8–15 (Mid) and 16–23 (High) to be transferred. (L = 1)

This indicates the head number of the first sector to be transferred. (L = 0).

In LBA mode this register specifies the LBA bits 24–27 to be transferred. (L = 1)

This indicates the retry bit, but this bit is ignored.

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

124

Input parameters from the device

Sector Count This indicates the number of requested sectors not transferred. This will be zero, unless an unrecoverable error occurs.

LBA Low This indicates the sector number of the last transferred sector. (L = 0).

LBA High/Low

H

In LBA mode this register contains the current LBA bits 0–7. (L = 1)

This indicates the cylinder number of the last transferred sector. (L = 0).

In LBA mode this register contains the current LBA bits 8–15 (Mid) and bits16–23

(High). (L=1)

This indicates the head number of the sector to be transferred. (L = 0)

In LBA mode this register contains the current LBA bits 24–27. (L = 1)

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

125

13.14 Read DMA EXT (25h)

Table 85: Read DMA EXT (25h)

Count

Device

Command Block Output Registers

Register

Data Low

Data High

Feature

Sector

LBA Low

LBA Mid

LBA High

Command

Current

Previous

Current

Previous

Current

Previous

Current

Previous

Current

Previous

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

1 1 1 D - - - -

0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1

Error Register

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

CRC UNC 0 IDN 0 ABT T0N AMN

V V 0 V 0 V 0 V

Command Block Input Registers

Register

Data Low

Data High

Error

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - see below

Sector

Count

LBA Low

LBA Mid

LBA High

Device

Status

HOB=0

HOB=1

HOB=0

HOB=1

HOB=0

HOB=1

HOB=0

HOB=1

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V - - - - - - -

See below ...

Status Register

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

BSY RDY DF DSC DRQ COR IDX ERR

0 V 0 V 0 V

The Read DMA command reads one or more sectors of data from disk media, then transfers the data from the device to the host.

The sectors are transferred through the Data Register 16 bits at a time.

The host initializes a slave-DMA channel prior to issuing the command. The data transfers are qualified by

DMARQ and are performed by the slave-DMA channel. The device issues only one interrupt per command to indicate that data transfer has terminated and status is available.

If an uncorrectable error occurs, the read will be terminated at the failing sector

Output parameters to the device

Sector Count Current This indicates the number of sectors to be transferred low order, bits (7-0)

Sector Count Previous This indicates the number of sectors to be transferred high order, bits (15-8). If 0000h in the Sector Count register is specified, 65.536 sectors will be transferred.

LBA Low Current LBA (7-0)

LBA Low Previous LBA (31-24)

LBA Mid Current LBA (15-8)

LBA Mid Previous LBA (39-32)

LBA High Current LBA (23-16)

LBA High Previous LBA (47-40)

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

126

Input parameters from the device

LBA Low (HOB=0) LBA (7-0) of the address of the first unrecoverable error

LBA Low (HOB=1) LBA (31-24) of the address of the first unrecoverable error

LBA Mid (HOB=0) LBA (15-8) of the address of the first unrecoverable error

LBA Mid (HOB=1) LBA (39-32) of the address of the first unrecoverable error

LBA High (HOB=0) LBA (23-16) of the address of the first unrecoverable error

LBA High (HOB=1) LBA (47-40) of the address of the first unrecoverable error

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

127

13.15 Read Long (22h/23h)

Table 86: Read Long (22h/23h)

Command Block Output Registers

Register

Data

Feature

Sector Count

LBA Low

LBA Mid

LBA High

Device

Command

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

1 L 1 D H H H H

0 0 1 0 0 0 1 R

Error Register

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

CRC UNC 0 IDN 0 ABT T0N AMN

0 0 0 V 0 V 0 V

Command Block Input Registers

Register

Data

Error

Sector Count

LBA Low

LBA Mid

LBA High

Device

Status

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

- - - - - - - see below

- - - - - - - V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

- - - - - H H H H see below

Status Register

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

BSY RDY DF DSC DRQ COR IDX ERR

0 V 0 V 0 V

The Read Long command reads the designated one sector of data and the ECC bytes from the disk media. It then transfers the data and ECC bytes from the device to the host.

After 512 bytes of data have been transferred, the device will keep setting DRQ = 1 to indicate that the device is ready to transfer the ECC bytes to the host. The data is transferred 16 bits at a time and the ECC bytes are transferred 8 bits at a time. The number of ECC bytes are 4 or 40 according to the setting of Set Feature option. The default setting is 4 bytes of ECC data.

The command makes a single attempt to read the data and does not check the data using ECC. Whatever is read is returned to the host.

Output parameters to the device

Sector Count This indicates the number of continuous sectors to be transferred. The Sector Count must be set to one.

LBA Low

LBA High/Mid

This indicates the sector number of the sector to be transferred. (L = 0)

In LBA mode, this register contains LBA bits 0–7. (L = 1)

This indicates the cylinder number of the sector to be transferred. (L = 0)

In LBA mode, this register contains LBA bits 8–15 (Low), 16–23 (High). (L = 1)

H

R

This indicates the head number of the sector to be transferred. (L = 0)

In LBA mode, this register contains LBA bits 24–27. (L = 1)

This indicates the retry bit; this bit is ignored.

Input parameters from the device

Sector Count This indicates the number of requested sectors not transferred

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

128

LBA Low

LBA High/Low

H

This indicates the sector number of the transferred sector. (L = 0)

In LBA mode, this register contains current LBA bits 0–7. (L = 1)

This indicates the cylinder number of the transferred sector. (L = 0)

In LBA mode, this register contains current LBA bits 8–15 (Low), 16–23 (High). (L = 1)

This indicates the head number of the transferred sector. (L = 0)

In LBA mode, this register contains current LBA bits 24–27. (L = 1)

The device internally uses 40 bytes of ECC data on all data written or read from the disk. The 4-byte mode of operation is provided by means of an emulation. Use of the 40 byte ECC mode is recommended for testing the effectiveness and integrity of the ECC functions of the device.

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

129

13.16 Read Multiple (C4h)

Table 87: Read Multiple (C4h)

Command Block Output Registers

Register

Data

Feature

Sector Count

LBA Low

LBA Mid

LBA High

Device

Command

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

1 L 1 D H H H H

1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0

Error Register

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

CRC UNC 0 IDN 0 ABT T0N AMN

0 V 0 V 0 V 0 V

Command Block Input Registers

Register

Data

Error

Sector Count

LBA Low

LBA Mid

LBA High

Device

Status

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

- - - - - - - see below

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

- - - - - H H H H see below

Status Register

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

BSY RDY DF DSC DRQ COR IDX ERR

0 V 0 V 0 V

The Read Multiple command reads one or more sectors of data from disk media and then transfers the data from the device to the host.

The sectors are transferred through the Data Register 16 bits at a time. The command execution is identical to the

Read Sectors command with one exception: an interrupt is generated for each block—as defined by the Set Multiple command—instead of for each sector.

Output parameters to the device

Sector Count This indicates the number of continuous sectors to be transferred. If zero is specified, 256 sectors will be transferred.

LBA Low This indicates the sector number of the first sector to be transferred. (L = 0)

LBA High/Low

H

In LBA mode, this register contains LBA bits 0–7. (L = 1)

This indicates the cylinder number of the first sector to be transferred. (L = 0)

In LBA mode, this register contains LBA bits 8–15 (Mid), 16–23 (High). (L = 1)

This indicates the head number of the first sector to be transferred. (L = 0)

In LBA mode, this register contains LBA bits 24–27. (L = 1)

Input parameters from the device

Sector Count

LBA Low

This indicates the number of requested sectors not transferred. This number is zero unless an unrecoverable error occurs.

This indicates the sector number of the last transferred sector. (L = 0)

In LBA mode, this register contains current LBA bits 0–7. (L = 1)

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

130

LBA High/Low

H

This indicates the cylinder number of the last transferred sector. (L = 0)

In LBA mode, this register contains current LBA bits 8–15 (Mid), 16–23 (High). (L = 1)

This indicates the head number of the last transferred sector. (L = 0)

In LBA mode, this register contains current LBA bits 24–27. (L = 1)

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

131

13.17 Read Multiple EXT (29h)

Table 88: Read Multiple EXT (29h)

Count

Device

Command Block Output Registers

Register

Data Low

Data High

Feature

Sector

LBA Low

LBA Mid

LBA High

Command

Current

Previous

Current

Previous

Current

Previous

Current

Previous

Current

Previous

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

1 1 1 D - - - -

0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1

Command Block Input Registers

Register

Data Low

Data High

Error

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - see below

Sector

Count

LBA Low

LBA Mid

LBA High

HOB=0

HOB=1

HOB=0

HOB=1

HOB=0

HOB=1

HOB=0

HOB=1

Device

Status

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V - - - - - - -

See below ...

Error Register

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

CRC UNC 0 IDN 0 ABT T0N AMN

0 V 0 V 0 V 0 V

Status Register

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

BSY RDY DF DSC DRQ COR IDX ERR

0 V 0 V 0 V

Output parameters to the device

Sector Count Current This indicates the number of sectors to be transferred low order, bits (7-0)

Sector Count Previous This indicates the number of sectors to be transferred high order, bits (15-8). If 0000h in the Sector Count register is specified, 65.536 sectors will be transferred.

LBA Low Current LBA (7-0)

LBA Low Previous LBA (31-24)

LBA Mid Current LBA (15-8)

LBA Mid Previous LBA (39-32)

LBA High Current LBA (23-16)

LBA High Previous LBA (47-40)

Input parameters from the device

LBA Low (HOB=0) LBA (7-0) of the address of the first unrecoverable error

LBA Low (HOB=1) LBA (31-24) of the address of the first unrecoverable error

LBA Mid (HOB=0) LBA (15-8) of the address of the first unrecoverable error

LBA Mid (HOB=1) LBA (39-32) of the address of the first unrecoverable error

LBA High (HOB=0) LBA (23-16) of the address of the first unrecoverable error

LBA High (HOB=1) LBA (47-40) of the address of the first unrecoverable error

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

132

13.18 Read Native Max ADDRESS (F8h)

Table 89: Read Native Max ADDRESS (F8h)

Command Block Output Registers

Register

Data

Feature

Sector Count

LBA Low

LBA Mid

LBA High

Device

Command

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

1 L 1 D - - - -

1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0

Command Block Input Registers

Register

Data

Error

Sector Count

LBA Low

LBA Mid

LBA High

Device

Status

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

- - - - - - - see below

- - - - - - - -

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

- - - - - H H H H see below

Error Register

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

CRC UNC 0 IDN 0 ABT T0N AMN

0 0 0 0 0 V 0 0

Status Register

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

BSY RDY DF DSC DRQ COR IDX ERR

0 V 0 0 V

This command returns the native max LBA/CYL of the drive which is not effected by the Set Max ADDRESS command. Even if the Address Offset mode is enabled, the native max LBA/CYL is returned.

The 48-bit native max address is greater than 268,435,455, the Read Native Max Address command returns a value of 268,435,455.

-

Output parameters to the device

L

D

LBA mode. This indicates the addressing mode. L = 0 specifies CHS mode and L = 1 specifies the LBA addressing mode.

This is the device number bit. Indicates that the device number bit of the Device/Head

Register should be specified. D = 0 selects the master device and D = 1 selects the slave device.

Indicates that the bit is not used.

-

Input parameters from the device

LBA Low

LBA High/Mid

H

V

In LBA mode this register contains the native max LBA bits 0–7. (L = 1)

In CHS mode this register contains the native max LBA Low. (L = 0)

In LBA mode this register contains the native max LBA bits 8–15 (Mid) and bits 16–23

(High). (L = 1)

In CHS mode this register contains the native max cylinder number. (L = 0)

In LBA mode this register contains the native max LBA bits 24–27. (L = 1)

In CHS mode this register contains the native maximum head number. (L = 0)

Valid. Indicates that the bit is part of an input parameter and will be set to 0 or 1 by the device.

This indicates that the bit is not used

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

133

13.19 Read Native Max ADDRESS EXT (27h)

Table 90: Read Native Max ADDRESS EXT (27h)

Count

Device

Command Block Output Registers

Register

Data Low

Data High

Feature

Sector

LBA Low

LBA Mid

LBA High

Command

Current

Previous

Current

Previous

Current

Previous

Current

Previous

Current

Previous

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

1 1 1 D - - - -

0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1

Command Block Input Registers

Register

Data Low

Data High

Error

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - see below

Sector

Count

LBA Low

LBA Mid

LBA High

HOB=0

HOB=1

HOB=0

HOB=1

HOB=0

HOB=1

HOB=0

HOB=1

Device

Status

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V - - - - - - -

See below ...

Error Register

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

CRC UNC 0 IDN 0 ABT T0N AMN

0 0 0 0 0 V 0 0

Status Register

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

BSY RDY DF DSC DRQ COR IDX ERR

0 V 0 0 V

This command returns the native max LBA of HDD which is not effected by Set Max ADDRESS EXT command.

Input parameters from the device

LBA Low (HOB=0) LBA (7-0) of the address of the Native max areas.

LBA Low (HOB=1) LBA (31-24) of the address of the Native max areas.

LBA Mid (HOB=0) LBA (15-8) of the address of the Native max areas.

LBA Mid (HOB=1) LBA (39-32) of the address of the Native max areas.

LBA High (HOB=0) LBA (23-16) of the address of the Native max areas.

LBA High (HOB=1) LBA (47-40) of the address of the Native max areas.

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

134

13.20 Read Sectors (20h/21h)

Table 91: Read Sectors (20h/21h)

Command Block Output Registers

Register

Data

Feature

Sector Count

LBA Low

LBA Mid

LBA High

Device

Command

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

1 L 1 D H H H H

0 0 1 0 0 0 0 R

Error Register

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

CRC UNC 0 IDN 0 ABT T0N AMN

0 V 0 V 0 V 0 V

Command Block Input Registers

Register

Data

Error

Sector Count

LBA Low

LBA Mid

LBA High

Device

Status

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

- - - - - - - see below

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

- - - - - H H H H see below

Status Register

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

BSY RDY DF DSC DRQ COR IDX ERR

0 V 0 V 0 V

The Read Sectors command reads one or more sectors of data from disk media and then transfers the data from the device to the host.

The sectors are transferred through the Data Register 16 bits at a time. If an uncorrectable error occurs the read will be terminated at the failing sector.

Output parameters to the device

Sector Count

LBA Low

LBA High/Low

H

R

This indicates the number of continuous sectors to be transferred. If zero is specified, then

256sectors will be transferred.

This is the sector number of the first sector to be transferred. (L =0)

In LBA mode this register contains the LBA bits 0–7. (L = 1)

This is the cylinder number of the first sector to be transferred. (L = 0)

In LBA mode this register contains the LBA bits 8–15 (Low) and bits 16–23(High).(L = 1)

This is the head number of the first sector to be transferred. (L = 0)

In LBA mode this register contains the LBA bits 24–27. (L = 1)

This is the retry bit; this bit is ignored.

Input parameters from the device

Sector Count

LBA Low

LBA High/Low

H

This is the number of requested sectors not transferred. This will be zero, unless an unrecoverable error occurs.

This is the sector number of the last transferred sector. (L = 0)

In LBA mode this register contains the current LBA bits 0–7. (L = 1)

This is the cylinder number of the last transferred sector. (L = 0)

In LBA mode this register contains the current LBA bits 8–15 (Low) and bits 16–23

(High).(L = 1)

This is the head number of the last transferred sector. (L = 0)

In LBA mode this register contains the current LBA bits 24–27. (L = 1)

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

135

13.21 Read Sector(s) EXT (24h)

Table 92: Read Sector(s) EXT Command (24h)

Count

Device

Command Block Output Registers

Register

Data Low

Data High

Feature

Sector

LBA Low

LBA Mid

LBA High

Command

Current

Previous

Current

Previous

Current

Previous

Current

Previous

Current

Previous

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

1 1 1 D - - - -

0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0

Error Register

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

CRC UNC 0 IDN 0 ABT T0N AMN

0 V 0 V 0 V 0 V

Command Block Input Registers

Register

Data Low

Data High

Error

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - see below

Sector

Count

LBA Low

LBA Mid

LBA High

Device

Status

HOB=0

HOB=1

HOB=0

HOB=1

HOB=0

HOB=1

HOB=0

HOB=1

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V - - - - - - -

See below ...

Status Register

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

BSY RDY DF DSC DRQ COR IDX ERR

0 V 0 V 0 V

The Read Sector(s) Ext command reads from 1 to 65,536 sectors of data from disk media, then transfers the data from the device to the host.

The sectors are transferred through the Data Register 16 bits at a time.

If an uncorrectable error occurs, the read will be terminated at the failing sector.

Output parameters to the device

Sector Count Current This indicates the number of sectors to be transferred low order, bits (7-0)

Sector Count Previous This indicates the number of sectors to be transferred high order, bits (15-8). If 0000h in the Sector Count register is specified, 65.536 sectors will be transferred.

LBA Low Current LBA (7-0)

LBA Low Previous LBA (31-24)

LBA Mid Current LBA (15-8)

LBA Mid Previous LBA (39-32)

LBA High Current LBA (23-16)

LBA High Previous LBA (47-40)

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

136

Input parameters from the device

LBA Low (HOB=0) LBA (7-0) of the address of the first unrecoverable error

LBA Low (HOB=1) LBA (31-24) of the address of the first unrecoverable error

LBA Mid (HOB=0) LBA (15-8) of the address of the first unrecoverable error

LBA Mid (HOB=1) LBA (39-32) of the address of the first unrecoverable error

LBA High (HOB=0) LBA (23-16) of the address of the first unrecoverable error

LBA High(HOB=1) LBA (47-40) of the address of the first unrecoverable error

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

137

13.22 Read Verify Sectors (40h/41h)

Table 93: Read Verify Sectors (40h/41h)

Command Block Output Registers

Register

Data

Feature

Sector Count

LBA Low

LBA Mid

LBA High

Device

Command

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

1 L 1 D H H H H

0 0 1 0 0 0 0 R

Command Block Input Registers

Register

Data

Error

Sector Count

LBA Low

LBA Mid

LBA High

Device

Status

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

- - - - - - - see below

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

- - - - - H H H H see below

Error Register

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

CRC UNC 0 IDN 0 ABT T0N AMN

0 V 0 V 0 V 0 V

Status Register

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

BSY RDY DF DSC DRQ COR IDX ERR

0 V 0 V 0 V

The Read Verify Sector(s) command verifies one or more sectors on the device. No data is transferred to the host.

The difference between the Read Sector(s) command and Read Verify Sector(s) command is that data is transferred to the host during a Read Sectors command and data is not transferred to the host during a Read Verify Sectors command.

If an uncorrectable error occurs, the read verify will be terminated at the failing sector.

Output parameters to the device

Sector Count This is the number of continuous sectors to be verified. If zero is specified, 256 sectors will be verified.

LAB Low This is the sector number of the first sector to be transferred. (L = 0)

LBA High/Low

In LBA mode this register contains the LBA bits 0–7. (L = 1)

This is the cylinder number of the first sector to be transferred. (L = 0)

In LBA mode this register contains the LBA bits 8–15 (Mid) and bits 16–23 (High).

(L = 1)

H

R

This is the head number of the first sector to be transferred. (L = 0)

In LBA mode this register contains the LBA bits 24–27. (L = 1)

This is the retry bit; this bit is ignored.

Input parameters from the device

Sector Count

LBA Low

This is the number of requested sectors not transferred. This number will be zero, unless an unrecoverable error occurs.

This is the sector number of the last transferred sector. (L = 0)

In LBA mode this register contains the current LBA bits 0–7. (L = 1)

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

138

LBA High/Low

H

This is the cylinder number of the last transferred sector. (L = 0)

In LBA mode this register contains the current LBA bits 8–15 (Mid) and bits 16–23

(High).(L = 1)

This is the head number of the last transferred sector. (L = 0)

In LBA mode this register contains the current LBA bits 24–27. (L = 1)

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

139

13.23 Ready Verify Sector(s) EXT (42h)

Table 94: Read Verify Sector(s) EXT Command (42h)

Count

Device

Command Block Output Registers

Register

Data Low

Data High

Feature

Sector

LBA Low

LBA Mid

LBA High

Command

Current

Previous

Current

Previous

Current

Previous

Current

Previous

Current

Previous

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

1 1 1 D - - - -

0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0

Command Block Input Registers

Register

Data Low

Data High

Error

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - see below

Sector

Count

LBA Low

LBA Mid

LBA High

HOB=0

HOB=1

HOB=0

HOB=1

HOB=0

HOB=1

HOB=0

HOB=1

Device

Status

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V - - - - - - -

See below ...

Error Register

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

CRC UNC 0 IDN 0 ABT T0N AMN

0 V 0 V 0 V 0 V

Status Register

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

BSY RDY DF DSC DRQ COR IDX ERR

0 V 0 V 0 V

The Read Verify Sector(s) Ext verifies one or more sectors on the device. No data is transferred to the host.

The difference between the Read Sector(s) Ext command and the Read Verify Sector(s) Ext command is whether the data is transferred to the host or not.

If an uncorrectable error occurs, the Read Verify Sector(s) Ext will be terminated at the failing sector.

Output parameters to the device

Sector Count Current This indicates the number of sectors to be transferred low order, bits (7-0)

Sector Count Previous This indicates the number of sectors to be transferred high order, bits (15-8). If 0000h in the Sector Count register is specified, 65,536 sectors will be transferred.

LBA Low Current LBA (7-0)

LBA Low Previous LBA (31-24)

LBA Mid Current LBA (15-8)

LBA Mid Previous LBA (39-32)

LBA High Current LBA (23-16)

LBA High Previous LBA (47-40)

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

140

Input parameters from the device

LBA Low (HOB=0) LBA (7-0) of the address of the first unrecoverable error

LBA Low (HOB=1) LBA (31-24) of the address of the first unrecoverable error

LBA Mid (HOB=0) LBA (15-8) of the address of the first unrecoverable error

LBA Mid (HOB=1) LBA (39-32) of the address of the first unrecoverable error

LBA High (HOB=0) LBA (23-16) of the address of the first unrecoverable error

LBA High(HOB=1) LBA (47-40) of the address of the first unrecoverable error

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

141

13.24 Recalibrate (1xh)

Table 95: Recalibrate (1xh)

Command Block Output Registers

Register

Data

Feature

Sector Count

LBA Low

LBA Mid

LBA High

Device

Command

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

1 - 1 D - - - -

0 0 0 1 - - - -

Error Register

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

CRC UNC 0 IDN 0 ABT T0N AMN

0 0 0 0 0 V V 0

Command Block Input Registers

Register

Data

Error

Sector Count

LBA Low

LBA Mid

LBA High

Device

Status

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

- - - - - - - see below

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - see below

Status Register

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

BSY RDY DF DSC DRQ COR IDX ERR

0 V 0 V 0 V

The Recalibrate command moves the read/write heads from anywhere on the disk to cylinder 0.

If the device cannot reach cylinder 0, T0N (Track 0 Not Found) will be set in the Error Register.

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

142

13.25 Security Disable Password (F6h)

Table 96: Security Disable Password (F6h)

Command Block Output Registers

Register

Data

Feature

Sector Count

LBA Low

LBA Mid

LBA High

Device

Command

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

1 - 1 D - - - -

1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0

Command Block Input Registers

Register

Data

Error

Sector Count

LBA Low

LBA Mid

LBA High

Device

Status

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

- - - - - - - see below

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - - see below

Error Register

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

CRC UNC 0 IDN 0 ABT T0N AMN

0 0 0 0 0 V 0 0

Status Register

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

BSY RDY DF DSC DRQ COR IDX ERR

0 V 0 V 0 V

The Security Disable Password command disables the security mode feature (device lock function).

The Security Disable Password command requests a transfer of a single sector of data from the host including information specified in the table below. The device then checks the transferred password. If the User Password or

Master Password matches the given password, the device disables the security mode feature (device lock function).

This command does not change the Master Password which may be reactivated later by setting User Password.

This command should be executed in device unlock mode.

Table 97: Password Information for Security Disable Password command

Word Description

00 Control word

bit 0 : Identifier (1-Master, 0- User)

bits 1-15 : Reserved

01-16 Password (32 bytes)

17- 255 Reserved

The device will compare the password sent from this host with that specified in the control word.

Identifier Zero indicates that the device should check the supplied password against the user password stored internally. One indicates that the device should check the given password against the master password stored internally.

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

143

13.26 Security Disable Password (F6h)

Table 98: Security Disable Password (F6h)

Command Block Output Registers

Register

Data

Feature

Sector Count

LBA Low

LBA Mid

LBA High

Device

Command

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

1 - 1 D - - - -

1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1

Command Block Input Registers

Register

Data

Error

Sector Count

LBA Low

LBA Mid

LBA High

Device

Status

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

- - - - - - - see below

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - - see below

Error Register

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

CRC UNC 0 IDN 0 ABT T0N AMN

0 0 0 0 0 V 0 0

Status Register

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

BSY RDY DF DSC DRQ COR IDX ERR

0 V 0 V 0 V

The Security Erase Prepare command must be issued immediately before the Security Erase Unit command to enable device erasing and unlocking.

The Security Erase Prepare Command must be issued immediately before the Format Unit Command. This command is to prevent accidental erasure of the device.

This command does not request the transfer of data.

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

144

13.27 Security Erase Unit (F4h)

Table 99: Security Erase Unit (F4h)

Command Block Output Registers

Register

Data

Feature

Sector Count

LBA Low

LBA Mid

LBA High

Device

Command

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

1 - 1 D - - - -

1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0

Error Register

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

CRC UNC 0 IDN 0 ABT T0N AMN

0 0 0 0 0 V 0 0

Command Block Input Registers

Register

Data

Error

Sector Count

LBA Low

LBA Mid

LBA High

Device

Status

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

- - - - - - - see below

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - - see below

Status Register

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

BSY RDY DF DSC DRQ COR IDX ERR

0 V 0 V 0 V

The Security Erase Unit command initializes all user data sectors and then disables the device lock function.

Note that the Security Erase Unit command initializes from LBA 0 to Native MAX LBA. The Host MAX LBA is set by the Initialize Drive Parameter or the Set MAX ADDRESS command is ignored. The protected area by the

Set MAX ADDRESS command is also initialized.

This command requests the transfer of a single sector of data from the host including information specified in the table below.

If the password does not match, the device rejects the command with an Aborted error.

Table 100: Erase Unit information

Word Description

00 Control Word

bit 0 : Identifier (1- Master, 0- User)

bit 1-15 : Reserved

01-16 Password (32 bytes)

17-255 Reserved

Identifier Zero indicates that the device should check the supplied password against the user password stored internally. One indicates that the device should check the given password against the master password stored internally.

The Security Erase Unit command erases all user data and disables the security mode feature (device lock function). After completing of this command, all the user data will be initialized to zero with a write operation. At this time, the data write is not verified with a read operation to determine if the data sector is initialized correctly. At this time the defective sector information and the reassigned sector information for the device are not updated. The security erase prepare command should be completed immediately prior to the Security Erase Unit command. If the device receives a Security Erase Unit command without a prior Security Erase Prepare command, the device aborts the security erase unit command.

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

145

This command disables the security mode feature (device lock function), however, the master password is still stored internally within the device and may be reactivated later when a new user password is set. If you execute this command on disabling the security mode feature (device lock function), the password sent by the host is NOT compared with the Master Password and the User Password. The device only erases all user data.

The execution time of this command for each model is shown below:

IC25N080ATMR04-0

IC25N060ATMR04-0

IC25N040ATMR04-0

IC25N030ATMR04-0

IC25N020ATMR04-0

66

50

34

26

18

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

146

13.28 Security Freeze Lock (F5h)

Table 101: Security Freeze Lock (F5h)

Command Block Output Registers

Register

Data

Feature

Sector Count

LBA Low

LBA Mid

LBA High

Device

Command

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

1 - 1 D - - - -

1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1

Error Register

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

CRC UNC 0 IDN 0 ABT T0N AMN

0 0 0 0 0 V 0 0

Command Block Input Registers

Register

Data

Error

Sector Count

LBA Low

LBA Mid

LBA High

Device

Status

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

- - - - - - - see below

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - - see below

Status Register

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

BSY RDY DF DSC DRQ COR IDX ERR

0 V 0 0 V

The Security Freeze Lock Command allows the device to enter frozen mode immediately.

After this command is completed, the command which updates Security Mode Feature (Device Lock Function) is rejected.

Frozen mode is quit only by a Power off.

The following commands are rejected when the device is in frozen mode. Refer to Table 53: “Command table for device lock operation” on page 82.

• Security Set Password

• Security Unlock

• Security Disable Password

• Security Erase Unit

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

147

13.29 Security Set Password (F1h)

Table 102: Security Set Password (F1h)

Command Block Output Registers

Register

Data

Feature

Sector Count

LBA Low

LBA Mid

LBA High

Device

Command

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

1 - 1 D - - - -

1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1

Error Register

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

CRC UNC 0 IDN 0 ABT T0N AMN

0 0 0 0 0 V 0 0

Command Block Input Registers

Register

Data

Error

Sector Count

LBA Low

LBA Mid

LBA High

Device

Status

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

- - - - - - - see below

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - - see below

Status Register

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

BSY RDY DF DSC DRQ COR IDX ERR

0 V 0 0 V

The Security Set Password command enables the security mode feature (device lock function) and sets the master password or the user password.

The security mode feature (device lock function) is enabled by this command and the device is not locked immediately. The device is locked after the next power on reset or hard reset. When the MASTER password is set by this command, the master password is registered internally. The device is NOT locked after next power on reset or hard reset.

This command requests a transfer of a single sector of data from the host including the information specified in the table below.

The data transferred controls the function of this command.

Table 103: Security Set Password information

Word

00

01-16

17-18

19-255

Description

Control Word

bit 0 : Identifier (1-Master, 0-User)

bit 1-7 : Reserved

bit 8 : Security level (1-Maximum, 0-High)

bit 9-15 : Reserved

Password (32 bytes)

Master Password Revision Code (valid if Word0bit 0 = 1)

Reserved

Identifier

Zero indicates that the device should check the supplied password against the user password stored internally. One indicates that the device should check the given password against the master password stored internally.

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

148

Security Level

A zero indicates a High level, a one indicates a Maximum level. If the host sets the High level and the password is forgotten then the Master Password can be used to unlock the device. If the host sets the Maximum level and the user password is forgotten, only a Security Erase Prepare/Security Unit command can unlock the device and all data will be lost.

Password

The 32 bytes are always significant in the text of the password.

Master Password Revision Code

The Revision Code field is set with Master password. If Identifier is User, the Revision Code is not set. The Revision Code field is returned in Identify Device word 92. The valid Revision Codes are 0000h to FFFDh. The Default

Master Password Revision Code is FFFEh. The code FFFFh is reserved.

The setting of the Identifier and Security level bits interact as follows:

Identifier = User / Security level = High

The password supplied with the command will be saved as the new user password. The security mode feature

(lock function) will be enabled from the next power on. The drive may then be unlocked by either the user password or the previously set master password.

Identifier = Master / Security level = High

This combination will set a master password but will NOT enable the security mode feature (lock function).

Identifier = User / Security level = Maximum

The password supplied with the command will be saved as the new user password. The security mode feature

(lock function) will be enabled from the next power on. The drive may then be unlocked by only the user password. The master password previously set is still stored in the drive but may NOT be used to unlock the device.

Identifier = Master / Security level = Maximum

This combination will set a master password but will NOT enable the security mode feature (lock function).

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

149

13.30 Security Unlock (F2h)

Table 104: Security Unlock (F2h)

Command Block Output Registers

Register

Data

Feature

Sector Count

LBA Low

LBA Mid

LBA High

Device

Command

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

1 - 1 D - - - -

1 1 1 1 0 0 1 0

Error Register

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

CRC UNC 0 IDN 0 ABT T0N AMN

0 0 0 0 0 V 0 0

Command Block Input Registers

Register

Data

Error

Sector Count

LBA Low

LBA Mid

LBA High

Device

Status

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

- - - - - - - see below

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - - see below

Status Register

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

BSY RDY DF DSC DRQ COR IDX ERR

0 V 0 0 V

This command unlocks the password and causes the device to enter device unlock mode. If a power on reset or hard reset is done without executing the Security Disable Password command after this command is completed, the device will be in device lock mode. The password has not been changed yet.

The Security Unlock command requests to transfer a single sector of data from the host including information specified in the table below.

If the Identifier bit is set to master and the drive is in high security mode, the password supplied will be compared with the stored master password. If the drive is in maximum security mode, the security unlock will be rejected.

If the Identifier bit is set to user, the drive compares the supplied password with the stored user password.

If the password compare fails, the device returns an abort error to the host and decrements the unlock attempt counter. This counter is initially set to 5 and is decremented for each password mismatch. When this counter reaches zero, all password protected commands are rejected until there is a hard reset or a power off.

Word Description

00 Control Word

bit 0 : Identifier (1- Master, 0- User)

bit 1-15 : Reserved

01-16 Password (32 bytes)

17-255 Reserved

Identifier

A zero indicates that the device regards Password as the User Password. A one indicates that the device regards

Password as the Master Password.

The user can detect if the attempt to unlock the device has failed due to a mismatched password since this is the only reason that an abort error will be returned by the drive AFTER the password information has been sent to the device. If an abort error is returned by the device BEFORE the password data has been sent to the drive, then another problem exists.

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

150

13.31 Seek (7xh)

Table 105: Seek (7xh)

Command Block Output Registers

Register

Data

Feature

Sector Count

LBA Low

LBA Mid

LBA High

Device

Command

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

1 L 1 D H H H H

0 1 1 1 - - - -

Error Register

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

CRC UNC 0 IDN 0 ABT T0N AMN

0 0 0 V 0 V 0 0

Command Block Input Registers

Register

Data

Error

Sector Count

LBA Low

LBA Mid

LBA High

Device

Status

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

- - - - - - - see below

- - - - - - - -

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

- - - - H H H H see below

Status Register

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

BSY RDY DF DSC DRQ COR IDX ERR

0 V 0 V 0 V

The Seek command initiates a seek to the designated track and selects the designated head. The device does not need to be formatted for a seek to execute properly.

Output parameters to the device

LBA Low

LBA High/Mid

H

In LBA mode this register specifies the LBA address bits 0–7 for seek. (L = 1)

This is the cylinder number of the seek. In LBA mode this register specifies the LBA address bits 8–15 (Low) and bits 16–23 (High) for seek. (L = 1)

This indicates the head number of the seek. In LBA mode this register specifies the LBA address bits 24–27 for seek. (L = 1)

Input parameters from the device

LBA Low In LBA mode this register contains the current LBA bits 0–7. (L = 1)

LBA High/Mid

H

In LBA mode this register contains the current LBA bits 8–15 (Mid) and bits16–23

(High). (L = 1)

In LBA mode this register contains the current LBA bits 24–27. (L = 1)

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

151

13.32 Sense Condition (F0h: vendor specific)

Table 106: Sense Condition (F0h: vendor specific)

Command Block Output Registers

Register

Data

Feature

Sector Count

LBA Low

LBA Mid

LBA High

Device

Command

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

- - - - - - - -

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

1 - 1 D - - - -

1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0

Command Block Input Registers

Register

Data

Error

Sector Count

LBA Low

LBA Mid

LBA High

Device

Status

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

- - - - - - - see below

V V V V V V V V

- - - - - - - N

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - D - - - - see below

Error Register

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

CRC UNC 0 IDN 0 ABT T0N AMN

0 0 0 V 0 V 0 0

Status Register

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

BSY RDY DF DSC DRQ COR IDX ERR

V V V V V

The Sense Condition command is used to sense temperature in a device. This command is executable without spinning up even if a device is started with No Spin Up option. If this command is issued at the temperature out of range which is specified for operating condition, the error might be returned with IDN bit 1.

Output parameters to the device

Feature The Feature register must be set to 01h. All other values are rejected with setting ABORT bit in status register.

Input parameters from the device

Sector Count The Sector Count register contains result value.

Value

00h

Description

Temperature is equal to or lower than –20°C

01h–FEh

FFh

Temperature is (Value/2–20)°C

Temperature is higher than 107°C

N Not recommendable condition for start up. If over stressed condition is detected, this bit will be set to one.

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

152

13.33 Set Features (EFh)

Table 107: Set Features (EFh)

Command Block Output Registers

Register

Data

Feature

Sector Count

LBA Low

LBA Mid

LBA High

Device

Command

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

- - - - - - - -

V V V V V V V V see note 1

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

1 - 1 D - - - -

1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1

Error Register

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

CRC UNC 0 IDN 0 ABT T0N AMN

0 0 0 0 0 V 0 0

Command Block Input Registers

Register

Data

Error

Sector Count

LBA Low

LBA Mid

LBA High

Device

Status

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

- - - - - - - see below

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - see below

Status Register

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

BSY RDY DF DSC DRQ COR IDX ERR

0 V 0 0 V

The Set Feature command establishes the following parameters which affect the execution of certain features as shown in the table below.

ABT will be set to 1 in the Error Register if the Feature register contains any undefined values.

After the power on reset or hard reset the device is set to the following features as default.

Write cache

ECC bytes

Read look-ahead

Reverting to power on defaults

Address Offset mode

Enable

4 bytes

Enable

Disable

Disable

Output parameters to the device

02H

03H

05H

09H

44H

55H

66H

82H

85H

89H

AAH

BBH

CCH

Enable write cache (See note 2)

Set transfer mode based on value in sector count register

Reserved (See note 3)

Enable Address Offset mode

40 bytes of ECC apply on Read Long/Write Long commands

Disable read look-ahead feature

Disable reverting to power on defaults

Disable write cache

Reserved (See note 3)

Disable Address Offset mode

Enable read look-ahead feature

4 bytes of ECC apply on Read Long/Write Long commands

Enable reverting to power on defaults

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

153

Note 1. When the Feature register is 03h (= Set Transfer mode) the Sector Count Register specifies the transfer mechanism. The upper 5 bits define the type of transfer and the low order 3 bits encode the mode value.

PIO Default Transfer Mode

PIO Default Transfer Mode, Disable IORDY

PIO Flow Control Transfer Mode X

Multiword DMA mode x

Ultra DMA mode x

00000 000

00000 001

00001 nnn (nnn=000,001,010,011,100)

00100 nnn (nnn=000,001,010)

01000 nnn (nnn=000,001,010,011,100)

When the Feature Register is 05h (=Enable Advanced Power Management) the Sector Count Register specifies the

Advanced Power Management level.

C0h-FEh

80h-BFh

01h-7Fh

00h, FFh

The deepest Power Saving Mode is Active Idle

The deepest Power Saving Mode is Low Power Idle

The deepest Power Saving Mode is Standby

Aborted

Note 2. If the number of auto reassigned sectors reaches the device's reassignment capacity, the write cache function will be automatically disabled. Although the device still accepts the Set Features command (with Feature register = 02h) without error, the write cache function will remain disabled. For the current write cache function status, refer to the Identify Device Information (129 word) by the Identify Device command.

Hard reset or power off must not be done during the first 5 seconds after write command completion when write cache is enabled.

Note 3. When the Feature register is 85h (=Disable Advanced Power Management), the deepest Power Saving mode becomes Active Idle. .

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

154

13.34 Set Max ADDRESS (F9h)

Table 108: Set Max ADDRESS (F9h)

Command Block Output Registers

Register

Data

Feature

Sector Count

LBA Low

LBA Mid

LBA High

Device

Command

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

- - - - - - - -

V V V V V V V V

- - - - - - - B

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

1 L 1 D H H H H

1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1

Error Register

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

CRC UNC 0 IDN 0 ABT T0N AMN

0 0 0 0 0 V 0 0

Command Block Input Registers

Register

Data

Error

Sector Count

LBA Low

LBA Mid

LBA High

Device

Status

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

- - - - - - - see below

- - - - - - - -

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

- - - - H H H H see below

Status Register

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

BSY RDY DF DSC DRQ COR IDX ERR

0 V 0 0 V

The Set Max ADDRESS command overwrites the max LBA/CYL of the drive in a range of actual device capacities. Once the device receives this command, all accesses beyond that LBA/CYL are rejected by setting the

ABORT bit in the status register. Identify the device command and Identify the device DMA command returns the

LBA/CYL which is set via this command as a default value.

This command implement SET MAX security extension commands as subcommands. But regardless of Feature register value, the case this command is immediately preceded by a Read Native Max ADDRESS command, it is interpreted as a Set Max ADDRESS command.

The Read Native Max ADDRESS command should be issued and completed immediately prior to issuing the Set

Max ADDRESS command. If it is not, this command is interpreted as a Set Max security extension command which is designated by feature register.

If Set Max security mode is in the Locked or Frozen, the Set Max ADDRESS command is aborted. For more infor-

mation, see section 11.10.2 “Set Max security extension commands” on page 84.

In CHS mode, LBA High and LBA Mid specify the maximum cylinder number. The Head number of DEVICE and

LBA Low are ignored. The default value (see default CHS in Identify device information) is used for that.

In LBA mode,the Head number of Device, LBA High, LBA Mid and LBA Low specify the max LBA. This command sets this LBA as the max LBA of the device.

After a successful command completion, Identify Device response words (61:60) shall reflect the maximum address set with this command.

If the 48-bit Address feature set is supported, the value placed in Identify Device response words (103:100) shall be the same as the value placed in words (61:60). However, if the device contains greater than 268,435,455 sectors, the capacity addressable with 28-bit commands, and the address requested is 268,435,455, the max address shall be changed to the native maximum address, the value placed in words (61:60) shall be 268,435,455 and the value placed in words (103:100) shall be the native maximum address.

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

155

If a host protected area has been established by a Set Max Address Ext command, the device shall return command aborted.Output parameters to the device.

Feature

01h

Destination code for this command

SET MAX SET PASSWORD

02h

03h

04h

SET MAX LOCK

SET MAX UNLOCK

SET MAX FREEZE LOCK

When the Set Max ADDRESS command is executed, this register is ignored.

B

LBA Low

LBA High/Mid

H

L

D

This indicates the option bit for selection whether nonvolatile or volatile. B = 0 is the volatile condition. When B = 1, MAX LBA/CYL—which is set by the Set Max ADDRESS command—is preserved by POR and HARD RESET. When B = 0, MAX LBA/CYL— which is set by Set Max ADDRESS command—will be lost by POR and HARD RESET.

B = 1 is not valid when the device is in Address Offset mode and the command is aborted.Cylinder High/LowIn LBA mode this register contains LBA bits 8–15 (Low) and bits 16–23 (High) which are to be set. (L = 1)

In LBA mode, this register contains LBA bits 0 - 7 which is to be input (L=1). In CHS mode, this register is ignored. (L=0)

In LBA mode, this register contains LBA bits 8 - 15 (Mid), 16 - 23 (High) which is to be set. (L=1)

In CHS mode, this register contains max cylinder number which is to be set. (L=0)

In LBA mode this register contains LBA bits 24–27 which are to be input. (L = 1)

In CHS mode this register is ignored. (L = 0)

This indicates the LBA addressing mode. L = 0 specifies the CHS mode and L=1 specifies the LBA addressing mode.

This indicates the device number bit. The device number bit of the Device/Head should be specified. D = 0 selects the master device and D = 1 selects the slave device.

Input parameters from the device

LBA Low In LBA mode this register contains the Adjusted max. LBA bits 0–7.(L = 1)

In CHS mode this register contains the maximum LBA Low (= 63). (L = 0)

LBA High/Mid

H

In LBA mode this register contains the Adjusted max. LBA bits 8–15 (Mid) and bits 16-23

(High). (L = 1)

In CHS mode this register contains the max cylinder number which is set. (L=0)

In LBA mode this register contains the Adjusted max. LBA bits 24–27. (L = 1)

In CHS mode this register contains the maximum head number (= 15). (L = 0)

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

156

13.35 Set Max ADDRESS EXT (37h)

Table 109: Set Max ADDRESS EXT Command (37h)

Count

Device

Command Block Output Registers

Register

Data Low

Data High

Feature

Sector

LBA Low

LBA Mid

LBA High

Command

Current

Previous

Current

Previous

Current

Previous

Current

Previous

Current

Previous

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - B

- - - - - - - -

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

- 1 - D - - - -

0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1

Command Block Input Registers

Register

Data Low

Data High

Error

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - see below

Sector

Count

LBA Low

LBA Mid

LBA High

HOB=0

HOB=1

HOB=0

HOB=1

HOB=0

HOB=1

HOB=0

HOB=1

Device

Status

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V - - - - - - -

See below ...

Error Register

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

CRC UNC 0 IDN 0 ABT T0N AMN

0 0 0 0 0 V 0 0

Status Register

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

BSY RDY DF DSC DRQ COR IDX ERR

0 V 0 0 V

This command is immediately preceded by a Read Native Max Address Ext command.

This command overwrites the maximum number of Address of HDD in a range of actual device capacity. Once device receives this command, all accesses beyond that Address are rejected with setting ABORT bit in status register.

When the address requested is greater than 268,435,455, words (103:100) shall be modified to reflect the requested value, but words (61:60) shall not modified. When the address requested is equal to or less than 268,435,455, words (103:100) shall be modified to reflect the requested value, and words (61:60) shall also be modified.

If this command is not supported, the maximum value to be set exceeds the capacity of the device, a host protected area has been established by a Set Max Address command, the command is not immediately preceded by a Read

Native Max Address Ext command, or the device is in the Set Max Locked or Set Max Frozen state, the device shall return command aborted.

If the device in Address Offset mode receives this command with the nonvolatile option, the device returns aborted error to the host.

The device returns the command aborted for a second non-volatile Set Max Address Ext command until next power on or hardware reset.

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

157

Output parameters to the device

B Option bit for selection whether nonvolatile or volatile. B=0 is volatile condition. When

B=1, MAX Address which is set by Set Max Address Ext command is preserved by POR.

When B=0, MAX Address which is set by Set Max Address Ext command will be lost by

POR. B=1 is not valid when the device is in Address Offset mode.

LBA Low Current Set Max LBA (7-0)

LBA Low Previous Set Max LBA (31-24)

LBA Mid Current Set Max LBA (15-8)

LBA Mid Previous Set Max LBA (39-32)

LBA High Current Set Max LBA (23-16)

LBA High Previous Set Max LBA (47-40)

Input parameters from the device

LBA Low (HOB=0) Set Max LBA (7-0)

LBA Low (HOB=1) Set Max LBA (31-24)

LBA Mid (HOB=0) Set Max LBA (15-8)

LBA Mid (HOB=1) Set Max LBA (39-32)

LBA High (HOB=0) Set Max LBA (23-16)

LBA High(HOB=1) Set Max LBA (47-40)

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

158

13.36 Set Multiple (C9h)

Table 110: Set Multiple command (C6h)

Command Block Output Registers

Register

Data

Feature

Sector Count

LBA Low

LBA Mid

LBA High

Device

Command

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

V V V V V V V V

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

1 - 1 D - - - -

1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0

Error Register

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

CRC UNC 0 IDN 0 ABT T0N AMN

0 0 0 0 0 V 0 0

Command Block Input Registers

Register

Data

Error

Sector Count

LBA Low

LBA Mid

LBA High

Device

Status

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

- - - - - - - see below

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - see below

Status Register

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

BSY RDY DF DSC DRQ COR IDX ERR

0 V 0 0 V

The Set Multiple command enables the device to perform Read and Write Multiple commands and establishes the block size for these commands. The block size is the number of sectors to be transferred for each interrupt.

The default block size after power up or hard reset is 0. The Read Multiple and Write Multiple commands are disabled.

If an invalid block size is specified, an Abort error will be returned to the host. The Read Multiple and Write Multiple commands will be disabled.

Output parameters to the device

Sector Count This indicates the block size to be used for the Read Multiple and the Write Multiple commands. Valid block sizes can be selected from 0, 2, 4, 8 or 16. If 0 is specified, then the

Read Multiple and the Write Multiple commands are disabled.

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

159

13.37 Sleep (E6h/99h)

Table 111: Sleep (E6h/99h)

Command Block Output Registers

Register

Data

Feature

Sector Count

LBA Low

LBA Mid

LBA High

Device

Command

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

1 - 1 D - - - -

1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0

Error Register

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

CRC UNC 0 IDN 0 ABT T0N AMN

0 0 0 0 0 V 0 0

Command Block Input Registers

Register

Data

Error

Sector Count

LBA Low

LBA Mid

LBA High

Device

Status

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

- - - - - - - see below

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - see below

Status Register

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

BSY RDY DF DSC DRQ COR IDX ERR

0 V 0 V 0 V

This command is the only way to cause the device to enter Sleep Mode.

When this command is issued, the device confirms the completion of the cached write commands before it asserts

INTRQ. Then the device is spun down, and the interface becomes inactive. The only way to recover from Sleep

Mode is with a software reset or a hardware reset.

The use of hardware reset to recover from Sleep Mode may be incompatible with continued operation of the host system.

If the device is already spun down, the spin down sequence is not executed.

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

160

13.38 S.M.A.R.T. Function Set (B0h)

Table 112: S.M.A.R.T. Function Set (B0h)

Command Block Output Registers

Register

Data

Feature

Sector Count

LBA Low

LBA Mid

LBA High

Device

Command

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

- - - - - - - -

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

- - - - - - - -

0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1

1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0

1 - 1 D - - - -

1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0

Command Block Input Registers

Register

Data

Error

Sector Count

LBA Low

LBA Mid

LBA High

Device

Status

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

- - - - - - - see below

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - see below

Error Register

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

CRC UNC 0 IDN 0 ABT T0N AMN

0 0 0 0 0 V 0 0

Status Register

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

BSY RDY DF DSC DRQ COR IDX ERR

0 V 0 V 0 V

The S.M.A.R.T. Function Set command provides access to the Attribute Values, the Attribute Thresholds, and other low level subcommands that can be used for logging and reporting purposes and to accommodate special user needs. The S.M.A.R.T. Function Set command has several separate subcommands which are selectable via the device's Features Register when the S.M.A.R.T. Function Set command is issued by the host. In order to select a subcommand the host must write the subcommand code to the device's Features Register before issuing the

S.M.A.R.T. Function Set command. The subcommands and their respective codes are listed below.

Code Subcommand

D0h

D1h

D2h

D3h

D4h

D5h

D6h

D8h

D9h

DAh

DBh

S.M.A.R.T. Read Attribute Values

S.M.A.R.T. Read Attribute Thresholds

S.M.A.R.T. Enable/disable Attribute Autosave

S.M.A.R.T. Save Attribute Values

S.M.A.R.T. Execute Off-line Immediate

S.M.A.R.T. Read Log Sector

S.M.A.R.T. Write Log Sector

S.M.A.R.T. Enable Operations

S.M.A.R.T. Disable Operations

S.M.A.R.T. Return Status

S.M.A.R.T. Enable/Disable Automatic Off-line

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

161

13.38.1 S.M.A.R.T. Function Subcommands

13.38.1.1 S.M.A.R.T. Read Attribute Values (subcommand D0h)

This subcommand returns the device's Attribute Values to the host. Upon receipt of the S.M.A.R.T. Read Attribute

Values subcommand from the host, the device asserts BSY, saves any updated Attribute Values to the Attribute

Data sectors, asserts DRQ, clears BSY, asserts INTRQ, and then waits for the host to transfer the 512 bytes of

Attribute Value information from the device via the Data Register.

13.38.1.2 S.M.A.R.T. Read Attribute Thresholds (subcommand D1h)

This subcommand returns the device's Attribute Thresholds to the host. Upon receipt of the S.M.A.R.T. Read

Attribute Thresholds subcommand from the host, the device asserts BSY, reads the Attribute Thresholds from the

Attribute Threshold sectors, asserts DRQ, clears BSY, asserts INTRQ, and then waits for the host to transfer the

512 bytes of Attribute Thresholds information from the device via the Data Register.

13.38.1.3 S.M.A.R.T. Enable/Disable Attribute Autosave (subcommand D2h)

This subcommand enables and disables the attribute auto save feature of the device. The S.M.A.R.T. Enable/Disable Attribute Autosave subcommand allows the device to automatically save its updated Attribute Values to the

Attribute Data Sector at the timing of the first transition to Active idle mode and after 30 minutes after the last saving of Attribute Values. This subcommand causes the auto save feature to be disabled. The state of the Attribute

Autosave feature—either enabled or disabled—will be preserved by the device across the power cycle.

A value of 00h—written by the host into the device's Sector Count Register before issuing the S.M.A.R.T. Enable/

Disable Attribute Autosave subcommand—will cause this feature to be disabled. Disabling this feature does not preclude the device from saving Attribute Values to the Attribute Data sectors during some other normal operation such as during a power-up or a power-down.

A value of F1h—written by the host into the device's Sector Count Register before issuing the S.M.A.R.T. Enable/

Disable Attribute Autosave subcommand—will cause this feature to be enabled. Any other nonzero value written by the host into this register before issuing the S.M.A.R.T. Enable/Disable Attribute Autosave subcommand will

not change the current Autosave status. The device will respond with the error code specified in Table 121:

“S.M.A.R.T. Error Codes” on page 175.

The S.M.A.R.T. Disable Operations subcommand disables the auto save feature along with the device's S.M.A.R.T. operations.

Upon the receipt of the subcommand from the host, the device asserts BSY, enables or disables the Autosave feature, clears BSY, and asserts INTRQ.

13.38.1.4 S.M.A.R.T. Save Attribute Values (subcommand D3h)

This subcommand causes the device to immediately save any updated Attribute Values to the device's Attribute

Data sector regardless of the state of the Attribute Autosave feature. Upon receipt of the S.M.A.R.T. Save Attribute

Values subcommand from the host, the device asserts BSY, writes any updated Attribute Values to the Attribute

Data sector, clears BSY, and asserts INTRQ.

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

162

13.38.1.5 S.M.A.R.T. Execute Off-line Immediate (subcommand D4h)

This subcommand causes the device to immediately initiate the set of activities that collect Attribute data in an offline mode (off-line routine) or execute a self-test routine in either captive or off-line mode. The LBA Low register shall be set to specify the operation to be executed.

LBA Low

0

1

2

127

129

130

Operation to be executed

Execute S.M.A.R.T. off-line data collection routine immediately

Execute S.M.A.R.T. Short self-test routine immediately in off-line mode

Execute S.M.A.R.T. Extended self-test routine immediately in off-line mode

Abort off-line mode self-test routine

Execute S.M.A.R.T. Short self-test routine immediately in captive mode

Execute S.M.A.R.T. Extended self-test routine immediately in captive mode

Off-line mode: The device executes command completion before executing the specified routine. During execution of the routine the device will not set BSY nor clear DRDY. If the device is in the process of performing its routine and is interrupted by a new command from the host, the device will abort or suspend its routine and service the host within two seconds after receipt of the new command. After servicing the interrupting command, the device will resume its routine automatically or not start its routine depending on the interrupting command.

Captive mode: When executing self-test in captive mode, the device sets BSY to one and executes the specified self-test routine after receipt of the command. At the end of the routine, the device sets the execution result in the

Self-test execution status byte (see Table 113: “Device Attribute Data Structure” on page 166) and ATA regis-

ters—see definitions below—and then executes the command completion.

Status

Error

LBA Low

Set ERR to one when the self-test has failed

Set ABRT to one when the self-test has failed

Set to F4h when the self-test has failed

LBA High Set to 2Ch when the self-test has failed

13.38.1.6 S.M.A.R.T. Read Log Sector (subcommand D5h)

This command returns the specified log sector contents to the host.

The 512 bytes of data are returned at a command and the Sector Count value shall be set to one. The LBA Low shall be set to specify the log sector address.

Log sector address

01h

06h

80h-9Fh

Content

S.M.A.R.T. Error Log

S.M.A.R.T. Self-test Log

Host vendor specific

Type

Read Only

Read Only

Read/Write

13.38.1.7 S.M.A.R.T. Write Log Sector (subcommand D6h)

This command writes 512 bytes of data to the specified log sector. The 512 bytes of data are transferred at a command and the LBA Low value shall be set to one. The LBA Low shall be set to specify the log sector address (See

Table 112: “S.M.A.R.T. Function Set (B0h)” on page 161). If a Read Only log sector is specified, the device

returns ABRT error.

13.38.1.8 S.M.A.R.T. Enable Operations (subcommand D8h)

This subcommand enables access to all S.M.A.R.T. capabilities within the device. Prior to receipt of a S.M.A.R.T.

Enable Operations subcommand, Attribute Values are neither monitored nor saved by the device. The state of

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

163

S.M.A.R.T.—either enabled or disabled—will be preserved by the device across power cycles. Once enabled, the receipt of subsequent S.M.A.R.T. Enable Operations subcommands will not affect any of the Attribute Values.

Upon receipt of the S.M.A.R.T. Enable Operations subcommand from the host, the device asserts BSY, enables

S.M.A.R.T. capabilities and functions, clears BSY, and asserts INTRQ.

13.38.1.9 S.M.A.R.T. Disable Operations (subcommand D9h)

This subcommand disables all S.M.A.R.T. capabilities within the device including the device's attribute auto save feature. After receipt of this subcommand the device disables all S.M.A.R.T. operations. Non self-preserved

Attribute Values will no longer be monitored. The state of S.M.A.R.T.—either enabled or disabled—is preserved by the device across power cycles. Note that this subcommand does not preclude the device's power mode attribute auto saving.

Upon receipt of the S.M.A.R.T. Disable Operations subcommand from the host, the device asserts BSY, disables

S.M.A.R.T. capabilities and functions, clears BSY, and asserts INTRQ.

After receipt of the device of the S.M.A.R.T. Disable Operations subcommand from the host, all other S.M.A.R.T. subcommands—with the exception of S.M.A.R.T. Enable Operations—are disabled, and invalid and will be aborted by the device—including the S.M.A.R.T. Disable Operations subcommand— returning the error code as

specified in Table 121: “S.M.A.R.T. Error Codes” on page 175.

Any Attribute Values accumulated and saved to volatile memory prior to receipt of the S.M.A.R.T. Disable Operations command will be preserved in the device's Attribute Data Sectors. If the device is re-enabled, these Attribute

Values will be updated, as needed, upon receipt of a S.M.A.R.T. Read Attribute Values or a S.M.A.R.T. Save

Attribute Values command.

13.38.1.10 S.M.A.R.T. Return Status (subcommand DAh)

This subcommand is used to communicate the reliability status of the device to the host's request. Upon receipt of the S.M.A.R.T. Return Status subcommand the device asserts BSY, saves any updated Attribute Values to the reserved sector, and compares the updated Attribute Values to the Attribute Thresholds.

If the device does not detect a Threshold Exceeded Condition, or detects a Threshold Exceeded Condition but involving attributes are advisory, the device loads 4Fh into the LBA Mid register, C2h into the LBA High register, clears BSY, and asserts INTRQ.

If the device detects a Threshold Exceeded Condition for prefailure attributes, the device loads F4h into the LBA

Mid register, 2Ch into the LBA High register, clears BSY, and asserts INTRQ. Advisory attributes never result in a negative reliability condition.

13.38.1.11 S.M.A.R.T. Enable/Disable Automatic Off-line (subcommand DBh)

This subcommand enables and disables the optional feature that cause the device to perform the set of off-line data collection activities that automatically collect attribute data in an off-line mode and then save this data to the device's nonvolatile memory. This subcommand may either cause the device to automatically initiate or resume performance of its off-line data collection activities or cause the automatic off-line data collection feature to be disabled. This subcommand also enables and disables the off-line read scanning feature that cause the device to perform the entire read scanning with defect reallocation as the part of the off-line data collection activities.

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

164

The Sector Count register shall be set to specify the feature to be enabled or disabled:

Sector Count

00h

01h

F8h

F9h

Feature Description

Disable Automatic Off-line

Disable Off-line Read Scanning

Enable Automatic Off-line

Enable Off-line Read Scanning

A value of zero written by the host into the device's Sector Count register before issuing this subcommand shall cause the automatic off-line data collection feature to be disabled. Disabling this feature does not preclude the device from saving attribute values to nonvolatile memory during some other normal operation such as during a power-on, during a power-off sequence, or during an error recovery sequence.

A value of one written by the host into the device's Sector Count register before issuing this subcommand shall cause the off-line read scanning feature to be disabled. The Device does not perform the off-line read scanning at the off-line data collection activities which is initiated by the S.M.A.R.T. Execute Off-line Immediate (Subcommand D4h) or automatically if the off-line read scanning feature is disabled.

A value of F8h written by the host into the device's Sector Count register before issuing this subcommand shall cause the automatic Off-line data collection feature to be enabled.

A value of F9 written by the host into the device's Sector Count register before issuing this subcommand shall cause the off-line read scanning feature to be enabled. The Device perform the off-line read scanning at the off-line data collection activities which is initiated by the S.M.A.R.T. Execute Off-line Immediate (Subcommand D4h) even if the automatic off-line feature is disabled.

Any other nonzero value written by the host into this register before issuing this subcommand is vendor specific and will not change the current Automatic Off-Line Data Collection and Off-line Read Scanning status. However,

the device may respond with the error code specified in Table 121: “S.M.A.R.T. Error Codes” on page 175.

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

165

13.38.2 Device Attribute Data Structure

The following defines the 512 bytes that make up the Attribute Value information. This data structure is accessed by the host in its entirety using the S.M.A.R.T. Read Attribute Values subcommand. All multibyte fields shown in these data structures follow the ATA/ATAPI-5 specification for byte ordering, namely, that the least significant byte occupies the lowest numbered byte address location in the field.

Table 113: Device Attribute Data Structure

Description

Data Structure Revision Number

1st Device Attribute

30th Device Attribute

Off-line data collection status

Self-test execution status

Total time in seconds to complete off-line data collection activity

Current segment pointer

Off-line data collection capability

S.M.A.R.T. capability

S.M.A.R.T. device error logging capability

Self-test failure check point

Short self-test completion time in minutes

Extended self-test completion time in minutes

Reserved

Vendor specific

Data structure checksum

Byte

2

12

12

1

1

2

1

1

1

12

2

1

1

1

125

1

512

Offset

00h

02h

15Eh

16Ah

16Bh

16Ch

16Eh

16Fh

170h

172h

173h

174h

175h

176h

182h

1FFh

Format binary

(*1)

(*1)

(*1)

(*1)

(*1)

(*1)

(*1)

(*1)

(*1)

(*1)

(*1)

(*1)

(*1)

Value

0010h

(*2)

(*2)

(*2)

(*2)

(*2)

(*2)

1Bh

0003h

01h

(*2)

(*2)

(*2)

(*3)

(*3)

(*2)

(*1) – See following definitions

(*2) – This value varies due to actual operating condition.

(*3) – Filled with 00h.

13.38.2.1 Data Structure Revision Number

The Data Structure Revision Number identifies which version of this data structure is implemented by the device.

This revision number will be set to 0005h. This revision number identifies both the Attribute Value and Attribute

Threshold Data structures.

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

166

13.38.2.2 Individual Attribute Data Structure

The following defines the 12 bytes that make up the information for each Attribute entry in the Device Attribute

Data Structure.

Description

Attribute ID Number (01h to FFh)

Status Flags

Bit 0 Pre-Failure/Advisory

Bit 1 On-line Collection

Bit 2-5 Reserved (may be either 0 or 1)

Bit 6-15 Reserved (all 0)

Attribute Value (valid values from 01h to FEh)

00h invalid for attribute value -not to be used

01h minimum value

64h initial value for all attributes prior to any data collection

FDh maximum value

FEh value is not valid

FFh invalid for attribute value-not to be used

Reserved (may not be 0)

Reserved (may not be 0)

Reserved (00h)

Total Bytes

Byte

1

2

1

1

6

1

12

Offset

00h

01h

03h

04h

05h

0Bh

Value binary bit flags binary binary binary binary

Attribute ID Numbers: Any nonzero value in the Attribute ID Number indicates an active attribute. The device supports following Attribute ID Numbers. The names marked with (*) indicate that the corresponding Attribute

Values can be either collected on-line or off-line.

ID

9

10

12

191

192

193

194

196

197

198

199

7

8

4

5

2

3

0

1

Attribute Name

Indicates that this entry in the data structure is not used

Raw Read Error Rate (*)

Throughput Performance (*)

Spin Up Time

Start/Stop Count

Reallocated Sector Count

Seek Error Rate

Seek Time Performance (*)

Power-On Hours Count

Spin Retry Count

Device Power Cycle Count

Gsense Error Rate

Power Off Retract Count

Load/Unload Cycle Count

Device Temperature

Reallocation Event Count

Current Pending Sector Count

Off-Line Scan Uncorrectable Sector Count

Ultra DMA CRC Error Count

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

167

Table 114: Status Flag definitions

Bit Flag Name

0 Pre-Failure/

Advisory bit

Definition

If bit = 0, an Attribute Value less than or equal to its corresponding Attribute Threshold indicates an Advisory condition where the usage or age of the device has exceeded its intended design life period.

If bit = 1, an Attribute Value less than or equal to its corresponding Attribute Threshold indicates a Pre-Failure condition where imminent loss of data is being predicted.

1 On-Line Collective bit

If bit = 0, the Attribute Value is updated only during

Off-Line testing.

2-5

6-15

Reserved bits

Reserved bits

If bit = 1, the Attribute Value is updated during On-

Line testing or during both On-Line and Off-Line testing.

May either be 0 or 1

Always 0

Normalized values: The device will perform conversion of the raw Attribute Values to transform them into normalized values which the host can then compare with the Threshold values. A Threshold is the excursion limit for a normalized Attribute Value. In normalizing the raw data, the device will perform any necessary statistical validity checks to ensure that an instantaneous raw value is not improperly reflected in the normalized Attribute Value (i.e., one read error in the first 10 reads being interpreted as exceeding the read error rate threshold when the subsequent

1 billion reads all execute without error). The end points for the normalized values for all Attributes will be 1 (01h) at the low end and 100 (64h) at the high end for the device. For Performance and Error Rate Attributes, values greater than 100 are also possible. The maximum value possible is 253 (FDh).

13.38.2.3 Off-Line Data Collection Status

The value of this byte defines the current status of the off-line activities of the device. Bit 7 indicates an Automatic

Off-line Data Collection Status.

Bit 7 Automatic Off-line Data Collection Status

0 Automatic Off-line Data Collection is disabled.

1 Automatic Off-line Data Collection is enabled.

Bits 0–6 represent a hexadecimal status value reported by the device.

Value Definition

0 Off-line data collection never started.

2 All segments completed without errors. In this case the current segment pointer is equal to the total segments required.

4 Off-line data collection is suspended by the interrupting command.

5 Off-line data collecting is aborted by the interrupting command.

6 Off-line data collection is aborted with a fatal error.

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

168

13.38.2.4 Self-test execution status

Bit

0-3

4-7

Definition

Percent Self-test remaining. An approximation of the percent of the self-test routine remaining until completion given in ten percent increments. Valid values are 0 through 9.

Current Self-test execution status.

0 The self-test routine completed without error or has never been run.

1 The self-test routine was aborted by the host.

2 The self-test routine was interrupted by the host with a hard or soft reset.

3 The device was unable to complete the self-test routine due to a fatal error or unknown test error.

4 The self-test routine was completed with an unknown element failure.

5 The self-test routine was completed with an electrical element failure.

6 The self-test routine was completed with a servo element failure.

7 The self-test routine was completed with a read element failure.

15 The self-test routine is in progress.

13.38.2.5 Total time in seconds to complete off-line data collection activity

This field tells the host how many seconds the device requires to complete the off-line data collection activity.

13.38.2.6 Current segment pointer

This byte is a counter indicating the next segment to execute as an off-line data collection activity. Because the number of segments is 1, 01h is always returned in this field.

13.38.2.7 Off-line data collection capability

Bit

0

Definition

Execute Off-line Immediate implemented bit

0 S.M.A.R.T. Execute Off-line Immediate subcommand is not implemented

1 S.M.A.R.T. Execute Off-line Immediate subcommand is implemented

1 Enable/disable Automatic Off-line implemented bit

0 S.M.A.R.T. Enable/disable Automatic Off-line subcommand is not implemented

2

1 S.M.A.R.T. Enable/disable Automatic Off-line subcommand is implemented

Abort/restart off-line by host bit

0 The device will suspend off-line data collection activity after an interrupting command and resume it after a vendor specific event

1 The device will abort off-line data collection activity upon receipt of a new command

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

169

3 Off-line Read Scanning implemented bit

0 The device does not support Off-line Read Scanning

1 The device supports Off-line Read Scanning

4 Self-test implemented bit

0 Self-test routing is not implemented

1 Self-test routine is implemented

5-7 Reserved (0)

13.38.2.8 S.M.A.R.T. Capability

This word of bit flags describes the S.M.A.R.T. capabilities of the device. The device will return 03h indicating that the device will save its Attribute Values prior to going into a power saving mode and supports the S.M.A.R.T.

ENABLE/DISABLE ATTRIBUTE AUTOSAVE command.

Bit Definition

0 Pre-power mode attribute saving capability. If bit = 1, the device will save its Attribute Values prior to going into a power saving mode (Standby or Sleep mode).

1 Attribute auto save capability. If bit = 1, the device supports the S.M.A.R.T. ENABLE/ DISABLE

ATTRIBUTE AUTOSAVE command.

2-15 Reserved (0)

13.38.2.9 Error logging capability

Bit Definition

7-1 Reserved (0)

0 The Error Logging support bit. If bit = 1, the device supports the Error Logging

13.38.2.10 Self-test failure check point

This byte indicates the section of self-test where the device detected a failure.

13.38.2.11 Self-test completion time

These bytes are the minimum time in minutes to complete the self-test.

13.38.2.12 Data Structure Checksum

The Data Structure Checksum is the 2's compliment of the result of a simple 8-bit addition of the first 511 bytes in the data structure.

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

170

13.38.3 Device Attribute Thresholds data structure

The following defines the 512 bytes that make up the Attribute Threshold information. This data structure is accessed by the host in its entirety using the S.M.A.R.T. Read Attribute Thresholds. All multibyte fields shown in these data structures follow the ATA-3 specification for byte ordering, that is, that the least significant byte occupies the lowest numbered byte address location in the field.

The sequence of active Attribute Thresholds will appear in the same order as their corresponding Attribute Values.

Table 115: Device Attribute Thresholds Data Structure

Description Byte

Data Structure Revision Number

1st Device Attribute

2

12

...

..

... ..

30th Device Attribute

Reserved

Vendor specific

Data structure checksum

12

18

131

1

512

Offset

00h

02h

15Eh

16Ah

17Ch

1FFh

Format binary

(*1)

(*1)

Value

0010h

(*2)

(*2)

(*3)

(*3)

(*2)

(*1) – See the following definitions

(*2) – Value varies by actual operating condition

(*3) – Filled with 00h

13.38.3.1 Data Structure Revision Number

This value is the same as the value used in the Device Attributes Values Data Structure.

13.38.3.2 Individual Thresholds Data Structure

The following defines the 12 bytes that make up the information for each Threshold entry in the Device Attribute

Thresholds Data Structure. Attribute entries in the Individual Threshold Data Structure are in the same order and correspond to the entries in the Individual Attribute Data Structure.

Table 116: Individual Threshold Data Structure

Description

Attribute ID Number (01h to FFh)

Attribute Threshold (for comparison with

Attribute Values from 00h to FFh)

00h - "always passing" threshold value to be used for code test purposes

01h - minimum value for normal operation

FDh - maximum value for normal operation

FEh - invalid for threshold value

FFh - "always failing" threshold value to be used for code test purposes

Reserved (00h)

Total Bytes

Byte

1

1

10

12

Offset

00h

01h

02h

Format binary binary binary

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

171

13.38.3.3 Attribute ID Numbers

Attribute ID Numbers supported by the device are the same as Attribute Values Data Structures.

13.38.3.4 Attribute Threshold

These values are preset at the factory and are not meant to be changeable. However, the host might use the

"S.M.A.R.T. Write Attribute Threshold" subcommand to override these preset values in the Threshold sectors.

13.38.3.5 Data Structure Checksum

The Data Structure Checksum is the 2's compliment of the result of a simple 8-bit addition of the first 511 bytes in the data structure.

13.38.4 S.M.A.R.T. error log sector

The following defines the 512 bytes that make up the S.M.A.R.T. error log sector. All multibyte fields shown in these data structures follow the ATA/ATAPI-5 specifications for byte ordering.

Description

S.M.A.R.T. error log version

Error log pointer

1st error log data structure

2nd error log data structure

3rd error log data structure

4th error log data structure

5th error log data structure

Device error count

Reserved

Data structure checksum

Byte

90

90

90

2

1

1

90

90

57

1

512

Offset

00h

01h

02h

5Ch

B6h

110h

16Ah

1C4h

1C6h

1FFh

13.38.4.1 S.M.A.R.T. error log version

This value is set to 01h.

13.38.4.2 Error log pointer

This points to the most recent error log data structure. Only values 1 through 5 are valid.

13.38.4.3 Device error count

This field contains the total number of errors. The value will not roll over.

13.38.4.4 Error log data structure

The data format of each error log structure is shown below.

Table 117: Command data structure

Description

1st command data structure

2nd command data structure

3rd command data structure

4th command data structure

5th command data structure

Error data structure

Byte

12

12

12

12

12

30

90

Offset

00h

0Ch

18h

24h

30h

3Ch

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

172

13.38.4.5 Command data structure

Data format of each command data structure is shown below.

Table 118: Command data structure

Description

Device Control register

Features register

Sector count register

LBA Low register

LBA Mid register

LBA High register

Device register

Command register

Time stamp (milliseconds from

Power On)

Byte

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

4

Offset

00h

01h

02h

03h

04h

05h

06h

07h

08h

12

13.38.4.6 Error data structure

Data format of error data structure is shown below.

Table 119: Error data structure

Description

Reserved

Error register

Sector count register

LBA Low register

LBA Mid register

LBA High register

Device register

Status register

Extended error data (vendor specific)

State

Life time stamp (hours)

Byte

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

19

1

2

30

Offset

00h

01h

02h

03h

04h

05h

06h

07h

08h

1Bh

1Ch

State field contains a value indicating the device state when command was issued to the device.

Value x0h x1h x2h x3h x4h x5h-xAh xBh-xFh

State

Unknown

Sleep

Standby

Active/Idle

S.M.A.R.T. Off-line or Self-test

Reserved

Vendor specific

Note: The value of x is vendor specific

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

173

13.38.5 Self-test log data structure

The following defines the 512 bytes that make up the Self-test log sector. All multibyte fields shown in these data structures follow the ATA/ATAPI-5 specifications for byte ordering.

Table 120: Self-test log data structure

Description

Data structure revision

Self-test number

Self-test execution status

Life time power on hours

Self-test failure check point

LBA of first failure

Vendor specific

...

Vendor specific

Self-test log pointer

Reserved

Data structure checksum

2

1

2

1

512

Byte

1

4

15

1

2

2

1

Offset

00h n*18h+02h n*18h+03h n*18h+04h n*18h+06h n*18h+07h n*18h+08h

1FAh

1FCh

1FDh

1FFh

Note: N is 0 through 20

The data structure contains the descriptor of the Self-test that the device has performed. Each descriptor is 24 bytes long and the self-test data structure is capable to contain up to 21 descriptors.

After 21 descriptors has been recorded, the oldest descriptor will be overwritten with the new descriptor.

The self-test log pointer points to the most recent descriptor. When there is no descriptor, the value is 0. When there are descriptor(s), the value is 1 through 21.

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

174

13.38.6 Error reporting

The following table shows the values returned in the Status and Error Registers when specific error conditions are encountered by a device.

Table 121: S.M.A.R.T. Error Codes

Error condition

A S.M.A.R.T. FUNCTION SET command was received by the device without the required key being loaded into the

LBA High and LBA Mid registers.

A S.M.A.R.T. FUNCTION SET command was received by the device with a subcommand value in the Features Register that is either invalid or not supported by this device.

A S.M.A.R.T. FUNCTION SET command subcommand other than S.M.A.R.T. ENABLE OPERATIONS was received by the device while the device was in a "S.M.A.R.T. Disabled" state.

The device is unable to read its Attribute Values or

Attribute Thresholds data structure

The device is unable to write to its Attribute Values data structure.

Status Register

51h

51h

51h

51h

51h

Error Register

04h

04h

04h

10h or 40h

10h or 01h

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

175

13.39 Standby (E2h/96h)

Table 122: Standby (E2h/96h)

Command Block Output Registers

Register

Data

Feature

Sector Count

LBA Low

LBA Mid

LBA High

Device

Command

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

V V V V V V V V

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

1 - 1 D - - - -

1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0

Error Register

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

CRC UNC 0 IDN 0 ABT T0N AMN

0 0 0 0 0 V 0 0

Command Block Input Registers

Register

Data

Error

Sector Count

LBA Low

LBA Mid

LBA High

Device

Status

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

- - - - - - - see below

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - see below

Status Register

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

BSY RDY DF DSC DRQ COR IDX ERR

0 V 0 V 0 V

The Standby command causes the device to enter the Standby Mode immediately and to set the auto power down time-out parameter (standby timer).

When this command is issued, the device confirms the completion of the cached write commands before it asserts the INTRQ. Following the INTRQ the interface remains active and the device is spun down. If the device is already spun down, the spin down sequence is not executed.

During the Standby mode the device will respond to commands, however there will be a delay while waiting for the spindle to reach operating speed.

The timer starts counting down when the device returns to Idle mode.

Output parameters to the device

Sector Count The Time-out Parameter. If it is zero, the time-out interval (Standby Timer) is NOT disabled but is automatically set to 109 minutes. If it is other than zero the time-out interval is set for (Time-out

Parameter × 5) seconds.

When the automatic power down sequence is enabled, the device will enter the Standby mode automatically if the time-out interval expires with no device access from the host. The time-out interval will be reinitialized if there is a device access before the time-out interval expires.

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

176

13.40 Standby Immediate (E0h/94h)

Table 123: Standby Immediate (E0h/94h)

Command Block Output Registers

Register

Data

Feature

Sector Count

LBA Low

LBA Mid

LBA High

Device

Command

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

1 - 1 D - - - -

1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0

Command Block Input Registers

Register

Data

Error

Sector Count

LBA Low

LBA Mid

LBA High

Device

Status

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

- - - - - - - see below

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - see below

Error Register

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

CRC UNC 0 IDN 0 ABT T0N AMN

0 0 0 0 0 V 0 0

Status Register

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

BSY RDY DF DSC DRQ COR IDX ERR

0 V 0 V 0 V

The Standby Immediate command causes the device to enter the Standby mode immediately.

When this command is issued, the device confirms the completion of the cached write commands before it asserts the INTRQ. Following the INTRQ the interface remains active and the device is spun down. If the device is already spun down, the spin down sequence is not executed.

During the Standby mode the device will respond to commands, however there will be a delay while waiting for the spindle to reach operating speed.

The Standby Immediate command will not affect the auto power down time-out parameter.

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

177

13.41 Write Buffer (E8h)

Table 124: Write Buffer (E8h)

Command Block Output Registers

Register

Data

Feature

Sector Count

LBA Low

LBA Mid

LBA High

Device

Command

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

1 - 1 D - - - -

1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0

Error Register

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

CRC UNC 0 IDN 0 ABT T0N AMN

0 0 0 0 0 V 0 0

Command Block Input Registers

Register

Data

Error

Sector Count

LBA Low

LBA Mid

LBA High

Device

Status

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

- - - - - - - see below

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - see below

Status Register

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

BSY RDY DF DSC DRQ COR IDX ERR

0 V 0 0 V

The Write Buffer command transfers a sector of data from the host to the sector buffer of the device. The sectors of data are transferred through the Data Register 16 bits at a time.

The Read Buffer and Write Buffer commands are synchronized such that sequential Write Buffer and Read Buffer commands access the same 512 byte within the buffer.

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

178

13.42 Write DMA (CAh/CBh)

Table 125: Write DMA (CAh/CBh)

Command Block Output Registers

Register

Data

Feature

Sector Count

LBA Low

LBA Mid

LBA High

Device

Command

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

1 L 1 D H H H H

1 1 0 0 1 0 1 R

Error Register

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

CRC UNC 0 IDN 0 ABT T0N AMN

V 0 0 V 0 V 0 0

Command Block Input Registers

Register

Data

Error

Sector Count

LBA Low

LBA Mid

LBA High

Device

Status

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

- - - - - - - see below

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

- - - - H H H H see below

Status Register

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

BSY RDY DF DSC DRQ COR IDX ERR

0 V V V 0 V

The Write DMA command transfers one or more sectors of data from the host to the device and then the data is written to the disk media.

The sectors of data are transferred through the Data Register16 bits at a time.

The host initializes a slave-DMA channel prior to issuing the command. Data transfers are qualified by DMARQ and are performed by the slave-DMA channel. The device issues only one interrupt per command to indicate that data transfer has terminated and status is available.

If an uncorrectable error occurs, the write will be terminated at the failing sector.

Output parameters to the device

Sector Count This indicates the number of continuous sectors to be transferred. If zero is specified, then

256 sectors will be transferred.

LBA Low

LBA High/Mid

This indicates the sector number of the first sector to be transferred. (L = 0)In LBA mode this register contains the LBA bits 0–7. (L = 1)

This indicates number of the first sector to be transferred. (L = 0)

H

R

In LBA mode this register contains the LBA bits 8–15 (Mid) and bits 16–23 (High). (L=

1)

This indicates the head number of the first sector to be transferred. (L = 0)

In LBA mode this register contains the LBA bits 24–27. (L = 1)

This indicates the retry bit, but this bit is ignored.

Input parameters from the device

Sector Count This indicates the number of requested sectors not transferred. The Sector Count will be zero unless an unrecoverable error occurs.

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

179

LBA Low

LBA High/Mid

H

This indicates the sector number of the last transferred sector. (L = 0)

In LBA mode this register contains the current LBA bits 0–7. (L = 1)

This indicates the cylinder number of the last transferred sector. (L = 0)

In LBA mode this register contains the current LBA bits 8–15 (Mid) and bits 16–23

(High). (L = 1)

This indicates the head number of the last transferred sector. (L = 0)

LBA mode this register contains the current LBA bits 24–27. (L = 1)

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

180

13.43 Write DMA EXT (35h)

Table 126: Write DMA (35h)

Count

Device

Command Block Output Registers

Register

Data Low

Data High

Feature

Sector

LBA Low

LBA Mid

LBA High

Command

Current

Previous

Current

Previous

Current

Previous

Current

Previous

Current

Previous

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

- 1 - D - - - -

0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1

Error Register

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

CRC UNC 0 IDN 0 ABT T0N AMN

V 0 0 V 0 V 0 0

Command Block Input Registers

Register

Data Low

Data High

Error

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - see below

Sector

Count

LBA Low

LBA Mid

LBA High

Device

Status

HOB=0

HOB=1

HOB=0

HOB=1

HOB=0

HOB=1

HOB=0

HOB=1

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V - - - - - - -

See below ...

Status Register

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

BSY RDY DF DSC DRQ COR IDX ERR

0 V 0 V 0 V

The Write DMA Ext command transfers one or more sectors of data from the host to the device, then the data is written to the disk media.

The sectors of data are transferred through the Data Register 16 bits at a time.

The host initializes a slave-DMA channel prior to issuing the command. Data transfers are qualified by DMARQ and are performed by the slave-DMA channel. The device issues only one interrupt per command to indicate that data transfer has terminated and status is available.

If an uncorrectable error occurs, the write will be terminated at the failing sector.

Output parameters to the device

Sector Count Current The number of continuous sectors to be transferred low order, bits (7-0).

Sector Count Previous The number of continuous sectors to be transferred high order bits (15:8). If zero is specified in the Sector Count register, then 65,536 sectors will be transferred.

LBA Low Current LBA (7-0)

LBA Low Previous LBA (31-24)

LBA Mid Current LBA (15-8)

LBA Mid Previous LBA (39-32)

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

181

LBA High Current LBA (23-16)

LBA High Previous LBA (47-40)

Input parameters from the device

LBA Low (HOB=0) LBA (7-0) of the address of the first unrecoverable error

LBA Low (HOB=1) LBA (31-24) of the address of the first unrecoverable error

LBA Mid (HOB=0) LBA (15-8) of the address of the first unrecoverable error

LBA Mid (HOB=1) LBA (39-32) of the address of the first unrecoverable error

LBA High (HOB=0) LBA (23-16) of the address of the first unrecoverable error

LBA High(HOB=1) LBA (47-40) of the address of the first unrecoverable error

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

182

13.44 Write Long (32h/33h)

Table 127: Write Long (32h/33h)

Command Block Output Registers

Register

Data

Feature

Sector Count

LBA Low

LBA Mid

LBA High

Device

Command

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

1 L 1 D H H H H

0 0 1 1 0 0 1 R

Error Register

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

CRC UNC 0 IDN 0 ABT T0N AMN

0 0 0 V 0 V 0 0

Command Block Input Registers

Register

Data

Error

Sector Count

LBA Low

LBA Mid

LBA High

Device

Status

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

- - - - - - - see below

- - - - - - - V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

- - - - H H H H see below

Status Register

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

BSY RDY DF DSC DRQ COR IDX ERR

0 V V V 0 V

The Write Long command transfers the data and the ECC bytes of the designated one sector from the host to the device, then the data and the ECC bytes are written to the disk media.

After 512 bytes of data have been transferred, the device will keep setting DRQ = 1 to indicate that the device is ready to receive the ECC bytes from the host. The data is transferred 16 bits at a time and the ECC bytes are transferred 8 bits at a time. The number of ECC bytes are either 4 or 40 according to setting of the Set Feature option.

The default number after power on is 4 bytes.

Output parameters to the device

Sector Count

LBA Low

LBA High/Mid

H

R

This indicates the number of continuous sectors to be transferred. The Sector Count must be set to one.

This indicates the sector number of the sector to be transferred. (L = 0)

In LBA mode this register contains the LBA bits 0–7. (L = 1)

This indicates the cylinder number of the sector to be transferred. (L = 0)

In LBA mode this register contains the LBA bits 8–15 (Mid) and bits 16–23 (High)

(L = 1)

This indicates the head number of the sector to be transferred. (L = 0)

In LBA mode this register contains the LBA bits 24–27. (L = 1)

The retry bit, but this bit is ignored.

Input parameters from the device

Sector Count This indicates the number of requested sectors not transferred.

LBA Low This indicates the sector number of the sector to be transferred. (L = 0)

In LBA mode this register contains the current LBA bits 0–7. (L = 1)

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

183

LBA High/Mid

H

This indicates the cylinder number of the sector to be transferred. (L = 0)

In LBA mode this register contains current the LBA bits 8–15 (Mid) and bits 16–23

(High). (L = 1)

This indicates the head number of the sector to be transferred. (L = 0)

In LBA mode this register contains current the LBA bits 24–27. (L = 1)

The drive internally uses 40 bytes of ECC on all data read or writes. The 4-byte mode of operation is provided via an emulation technique. As a consequence of this emulation it is recommended that 40 byte ECC mode is used for all tests to confirm the operation of the ECC hardware of the drive. Unexpected results may occur if such testing is performed using 4-byte mode.

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

184

13.45 Write Multiple (C5h)

Table 128: Write Multiple (C5h)

Command Block Output Registers

Register

Data

Feature

Sector Count

LBA Low

LBA Mid

LBA High

Device

Command

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

1 L 1 D H H H H

1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1

Error Register

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

CRC UNC 0 IDN 0 ABT T0N AMN

0 0 0 V 0 V 0 0

Command Block Input Registers

Register

Data

Error

Sector Count

LBA Low

LBA Mid

LBA High

Device

Status

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

- - - - - - - see below

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

- - - - H H H H see below

Status Register

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

BSY RDY DF DSC DRQ COR IDX ERR

0 V V V 0 V

The Write Multiple command transfers one or more sectors from the host to the device. The data is then written to the disk media.

Command execution is identical to the Write Sectors command except that an interrupt is generated for each block as defined by the Set Multiple command instead of for each sector. The sectors are transferred through the Data

Register 16 bits at a time.

Output parameters to the device

Sector Count

LBA Low

LBA High/MId

H

This indicates the number of continuous sectors to be transferred. If the Sector Count of zero is specified, 256 sectors will be transferred.

This indicates the sector number of the first sector to be transferred. (L = 0)

In LBA mode this register contains the LBA bits 0–7. (L = 1)

This indicates the cylinder number of the first sector to be transferred. (L = 0)

In LBA mode this register contains the LBA bits 8–15 (Mid) and bits 16–23(High).(L = 1)

This indicates the head number of the first sector to be transferred. (L = 0)

In LBA mode this register contains the LBA bits 24–27. (L = 1)

Input parameters from the device

Sector Count

LBA Low

LBA High/Mid

H

This indicates the number of requested sectors not transferred. The Sector Count will be zero, unless an unrecoverable error occurs.

This indicates the sector number of the last transferred sector. (L = 0)

In LBA mode this register contains current the LBA bits 0–7. (L = 1)

This indicates the cylinder number of the last transferred sector. (L = 0)

In LBA mode this register contains the current LBA bits 8–15 (Mid) and bits 16–23

(High). (L = 1)

This indicates the head number of the last transferred sector. (L = 0)

In LBA mode this register contains current the LBA bits 24–27. (L = 1)

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

185

13.46 Write Multiple EXT (39h)

Write Multiple EXT (39h)

Count

Device

Command Block Output Registers

Register

Data Low

Data High

Feature

Sector

LBA Low

LBA Mid

LBA High

Command

Current

Previous

Current

Previous

Current

Previous

Current

Previous

Current

Previous

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

- 1 - D - - - -

0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1

Command Block Input Registers

Register

Data Low

Data High

Error

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - see below

Sector

Count

LBA Low

LBA Mid

LBA High

HOB=0

HOB=1

HOB=0

HOB=1

HOB=0

HOB=1

HOB=0

HOB=1

Device

Status

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V - - - - - - -

See below ...

Error Register

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

CRC UNC 0 IDN 0 ABT T0N AMN

0 0 0 V 0 V 0 0

Status Register

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

BSY RDY DF DSC DRQ COR IDX ERR

0 V 0 V 0 V

The Write Multiple Ext command transfers one or more sectors from the host to the device, then the data is written to the disk media.

Command execution is identical to the Write Sector(s) Ext command except that an interrupt is generated for each block (as defined by the Set Multiple command) instead of for each sector. The sectors are transferred through the

Data Register 16 bits at a time.

Output parameters to the device

Sector Count Current The number of continuous sectors to be transferred low order, bits (7-0).

Sector Count Previous The number of continuous sectors to be transferred high order bits (15-8). If zero is specified in the Sector Count register, then 65,536 sectors will be transferred.

LBA Low Current LBA (7-0)

LBA Low Previous LBA (31-24)

LBA Mid Current LBA (15-8)

LBA Mid Previous LBA (39-32)

LBA High Current LBA (23-16)

LBA High Previous LBA (47-40)

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

186

Input parameters from the device

LBA Low (HOB=0) LBA (7-0) of the address of the first unrecoverable error

LBA Low (HOB=1) LBA (31-24) of the address of the first unrecoverable error

LBA Mid (HOB=0) LBA (15-8) of the address of the first unrecoverable error

LBA Mid (HOB=1) LBA (39-32) of the address of the first unrecoverable error

LBA High (HOB=0) LBA (23-16) of the address of the first unrecoverable error

LBA High(HOB=1) LBA (47-40) of the address of the first unrecoverable error

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

187

13.47 Write Sectors (30h/31h)

Table 129: Write Sectors Command (30h/31h)

Command Block Output Registers

Register

Data

Feature

Sector Count

LBA Low

LBA Mid

LBA High

Device

Command

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

1 L 1 D H H H H

0 0 1 1 0 0 0 R

Error Register

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

CRC UNC 0 IDN 0 ABT T0N AMN

0 0 0 V 0 V 0 0

Command Block Input Registers

Register

Data

Error

Sector Count

LBA Low

LBA Mid

LBA High

Device

Status

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

- - - - - - - see below

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

- - - - H H H H see below

Status Register

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

BSY RDY DF DSC DRQ COR IDX ERR

0 V V V 0 V

The Write Sectors command transfers one or more sectors from the host to the device. The data is then written to the disk media.

The sectors are transferred through the Data Register 16 bits at a time.

If an uncorrectable error occurs, the write will be terminated at the failing sector, when the auto reassign function is disable.

Output parameters to the device

Sector Count

LBA Low

LBA High/Mid

H

R

This indicates the number of continuous sectors to be transferred. If the Sector Count of zero is specified, 256 sectors will be transferred.

This indicates the sector number of the first sector to be transferred. (L = 0)

In LBA mode this register contains the LBA bits 0–7. (L = 1)

This indicates the cylinder number of the first sector to be transferred. (L = 0)

In LBA mode this register contains the LBA bits 8–15 (Mid) and bits 16–23 (High)

(L = 1)

This indicates the head number of the first sector to be transferred. (L = 0)

In LBA mode this register contains the LBA bits 24–27. (L = 1)

This indicates the retry bit; this bit is ignored.

Input parameters from the device

Sector Count

LBA Low

This indicates the number of requested sectors not transferred. The Sector Count will be zero unless an unrecoverable error occurs.

This indicates the sector number of the last transferred sector. (L = 0)

In LBA mode this register contains the current LBA bits 0–7. (L = 1)

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

188

LBA High/Mid

H

This indicates the cylinder number of the last transferred sector. (L = 0)

In LBA mode this register contains the current LBA bits 8–15 (Mid) and bits 16–23

(High). (L = 1)

This indicates the head number of the last transferred sector. (L = 0)

In LBA mode this register contains the current LBA bits 24–27. (L = 1)

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

189

13.48 Write Sectors(s) EXT (34h)

Table 130: Write Sector(s) EXT Command (34h)

Count

Device

Command Block Output Registers

Register

Data Low

Data High

Feature

Sector

LBA Low

LBA Mid

LBA High

Command

Current

Previous

Current

Previous

Current

Previous

Current

Previous

Current

Previous

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

- 1 - D - - - -

0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0

Error Register

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

CRC UNC 0 IDN 0 ABT T0N AMN

0 0 0 V 0 V 0 0

Command Block Input Registers

Register

Data Low

Data High

Error

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - see below

Sector

Count

LBA Low

LBA Mid

LBA High

Device

Status

HOB=0

HOB=1

HOB=0

HOB=1

HOB=0

HOB=1

HOB=0

HOB=1

- - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - -

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

V - - - - - - -

See below ...

Status Register

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

BSY RDY DF DSC DRQ COR IDX ERR

0 V 0 V 0 V

The Write Sector(s) Ext command transfers one or more sectors from the host to the device, then the data is written to the disk media.

The sectors are transferred through the Data Register 16 bits at a time.

If an uncorrectable error occurs, the write will be terminated at the failing sector.

Output parameters to the device

Sector Count Current The number of continuous sectors to be transferred low order, bits (7-0).

Sector Count Previous The number of continuous sectors to be transferred high order bits (15-8). If zero is specified in the Sector Count register, then 65,536 sectors will be transferred.

LBA Low Current LBA (7-0)

LBA Low Previous LBA (31-24)

LBA Mid Current LBA (15-8)

LBA Mid Previous LBA (39-32)

LBA High Current LBA (23-16)

LBA High Previous LBA (47-40)

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

190

Input parameters from the device

LBA Low (HOB=0) LBA (7-0) of the address of the first unrecoverable error

LBA Low (HOB=1) LBA (31-24) of the address of the first unrecoverable error

LBA Mid (HOB=0) LBA (15-8) of the address of the first unrecoverable error

LBA Mid (HOB=1) LBA (39-32) of the address of the first unrecoverable error

LBA High (HOB=0) LBA (23-16) of the address of the first unrecoverable error

LBA High(HOB=1) LBA (47-40) of the address of the first unrecoverable error

13.49 Write Verify (3Ch: vendor specific)

In the implementation of the drive the Write Verify command is exactly the same as the Write Sectors command (30h). Read verification is not performed after the write operation.

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

191

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

192

14.0 Time-out values

The timing of BSY and DRQ in Status Register are shown in the table below.

Table 131: Time-out values

INTERVAL START

Power On

Software

Reset

Hard Reset

Data In Command

Data Out Command

Non-Data

Command

DMA Data

Transfer Command

Device Busy After

Power On

Device Ready After

Power On

Device Busy After Software Reset

Device Ready After

Software Reset

Device Busy After Hard

Reset

Device Ready After

Hard Reset

Device Busy After Command Code Out

Interrupt, DRQ For Data

Transfer In

Device Busy After Data

Transfer In

Device Busy After Command Code Out

Data Request For Data

Transfer Out

Device Busy After Data

Transfer Out

Interrupt For Data

Transfer Out

Device Busy After Command Code Out

Interrupt For Command

Complete

Device Busy After Command Code Out

Power On

Power On

Device Control Register RST=1

Device Control Register RST=0 After RST=1

Bus RESET Signal

Asserted

Bus RESET Signal

Asserted

OUT To Command

Register

Status Register BSY=1

256th Read From Data

Register

OUT to Command Register

Status Register BSY=1

256th Write From Data

Register

Status Register BSY=1

OUT to Command Register

Status Register BSY=1

OUT to Command Register

STOP

Status Register BSY=1

Status Register BSY=0 and RDY=1

Status Register BSY=1

Status Register BSY=0 and RDY=1

Status Register BSY=1

Status Register BSY=0 and RDY=1

Status Register BSY=1

Status Register BSY=0 and DRQ=1 Interrupt

Status Register BSY=1

Status Register BSY=1

Status Register BSY=0 and DRQ=1

Status Register BSY=1

Status Register BSY=0 and RDY=1 Interrupt

Status Register BSY=1

Interrupt

Status Register BSY=1

TIME-OUT

400 ns

31 sec

400 ns

31 sec

400 ns

31 sec

400 ns

30 sec

10

µs

400 ns

700

µs

(Note 3)

5

µs

30 sec

(Note 1)

400 ns

30 sec

(Note 2)

400 ns

The abbreviations "ns", "

µs", "ms" and "sec" mean nanoseconds, microseconds, milliseconds and seconds, respectively.

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

193

.

We recommend that the host system execute Soft reset and then retry to issue the command if the host system time-out would occur for the device.

Note 1. For SECURITY ERASE UNIT command, the execution time is referred to 13.27, “Security Erase

Unit (F4h)” on page 145.

Note 2. For FORMAT UNIT command, the execution time is referred to 13.7, “Format Unit (F7h: vendor specific)” on page 109.

Note 3. When the initial power mode at power on is Standby mode and when the following commands are issued by the host as First Command, the command's time-out value of the field is 10 seconds:

Security Disable Password

Security Erase Unit

Security Set Password

Security Unlock.

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

194

15.0 Appendix

15.1 Commands Support Coverage

The table below compares the command support coverage of the Travelstar 80GN with the ATA-6 defined command set. The third column indicates the capability of the Travelstar 80GN for those commands.

Table 132: Command coverage (1 of 2)

Code

32h

33h

38h

3Ch

40h

22h

23h

30h

31h

00h

03h

08h

1xh

20h

21h

24h

94h-99h

A0h

A1h

A2H

B0h

C0h

C4h

C5h

C6h

C7h

41h

50h

7xh

87h

90h

91h

92h

Command Name

NOP

CFA REQUEST EXTENDED ERROR CODE

DEVICE RESET

RECALIBRATE

READ SECTOR(S)

READ SECTOR(S)

READ SECTOR(S) EXT

READ LONG

READ LONG

WRITE SECTOR(S)

WRITE SECTOR(S)

WRITE LONG

WRITE LONG

CFA TRANSLATE SECTORS W/O ERASE

WRITE VERIFY (2)

READ VERIFY SECTOR(S)

READ VERIFY SECTOR(S)

FORMAT TRACK

SEEK

CFA TRANSLATE SECTORS

EXECUTE DEVICE DIAGNOSTIC

INITIALIZE DEVICE PARAMETERS

DOWNLOAD MICROCODE

Reserved

PACKET

IDENTIFY PACKET DEVICE

SERVICE

S.M.A.R.T. FUNCTION SET

CFA ERASE SECTORS

READ MULTIPLE

WRITE MULTIPLE

SET MULTIPLE MODE

READ DMA QUEUED

Implementation for

Travelstar 80GN

No

No

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

Vendor specific

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

Reserved

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

Reserved

No

No

No

Yes

No

ATA-6 Category

Type

Optional

Optional (Note 7)

Optional (Note 7)

Obsoleted

Mandatory

Obsoleted

Optional

Obsoleted

Obsoleted

Mandatory

Obsoleted

Obsoleted

Obsoleted

Optional (Note 7)

Obsoleted

Mandatory

Obsoleted

Obsoleted

Mandatory

Optional

Mandatory

Mandatory

Optional

Reserved

Not to be used

Not to be used

Not to be used

Optional (Note 5)

Optional

Mandatory

Mandatory

Mandatory

Optional

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

195

Table 133: Command coverage (2 of 2)

Code

C8h

C9h

CAh

F5h

F6h

F7h

F8h

F9h

FB-FFh

EDh

EEh

EFh

F0h

F1h

F2h

F3h

F4h

E2h

E3h

E4h

E5h

E6h

E7h

E8h

ECh

CBh

CCh

CDh

DAh

DEh

DFh

E0h

E1h

Command Name

READ DMA

READ DMA

WRITE DMA

WRITE DMA

WRITE DMA QUEUED

CFA WRITE MULTIPLE W/O ERASE

GET MEDIA STATUS

MEDIA LOCK

MEDIA UNLOCK

STANDBY IMMEDIATE

IDLE IMMEDIATE

STANDBY

IDLE

READ BUFFER

CHECK POWER MODE

SLEEP

FLUSH CACHE

WRITE BUFFER

IDENTIFY DEVICE

MEDIA EJECT

IDENTIFY DEVICE DMA

SET FEATURES

SENSE CONDITION

SECURITY SET PASSWORD

SECURITY UNLOCK

SECURITY ERASE PREPARE

SECURITY ERASE UNIT

SECURITY FREEZE LOCK

SECURITY DISABLE PASSWORD

FORMAT UNIT

READ NATIVE MAX ADDRESS

SET MAX ADDRESS

Vendor specific

Reserved: all remaining codes

Implementation for

Travelstar 80GN

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

No

Yes

Vendor specific

Yes

Yes

Vendor specific

Yes

Yes

Reserved

Reserved

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

No

No

ATA-6 Category

Type

Mandatory

Obsoleted

Mandatory

Obsoleted

Optional

Optional (Note 7)

Optional (Note 7)

Optional (Note 7)

Optional (Note 7)

Mandatory

Mandatory

Mandatory

Mandatory

Optional

Mandatory

Mandatory

Mandatory

Optional

Mandatory

Optional (Note 7)

Obsoleted

Mandatory

Vendor specific

Optional (Note 6)

Optional (Note 6)

Optional (Note 6)

Optional (Note 6)

Optional (Note 6)

Optional (Note 6)

Vendor specific

Optional

Optional

Vendor specific

Reserved

Note 1. These commands have two command codes and appear in this table twice, once for each command code.

Note 2. The WRITE VERIFY command implemented vendor specific. The operation is the same as

WRITE SECTORS and verification is not performed.

Note 3. Protected Area Feature Set

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

196

Note 4. Power Management Feature Set

Note 5. S.M.A.R.T. Function Set

Note 6. Security Mode Feature Set

Note 7. Removable

15.2 SET FEATURES Commands Support Coverage

The following table provides a list of Feature Registers, Feature Names, and implementation for the

Travelstar 80GN. The third column indicates whether or not the Travelstar 80GN has the capability of executing the command in comparison to the ATA-6 defined command set. For detailed operation, refer to

section 13.33, “Set Features (EFh)”, on page 153.

Table 134: SET FEATURES command coverage

Features

Register

66h

82h

85h

89h

95h

AAh

BBh

CCh

02h

03h

05h

09h

44h

55h

5Dh

5Eh

DDh

EEh others

Enable write cache

Set transfer mode

Enable Advanced Power Management

Enable Address Offset mode

Set vendor specific bytes ECC

Disable read look-ahead feature

Enable release interrupt

Enable SERVICE interrupt

Disable reverting to power on defaults

Disable write cache

Disable Advanced Power Management

Disable Address Offset mode

Enable Media Status Notification

Enable read look-ahead feature

Set 4 bytes ECC

Enable reverting to power on defaults

Disable release interrupt

Disable SERVICE interrupt

Reserved

Features Name

Implementation for

Travelstar 80GN

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

No

Reserved

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

197

15.3 Changes from Travelstar 60GH and 40GN

The changes between the Travelstar 60GH & 40-GN and the Travelstar 80GN are listed below:

• Identify device information data

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

198

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

199

Travelstar 80GN Hard Disk Drive Specification

200

Hitachi Global Storage Technologies

Index

A

Abbreviations ................................................5

Acoustics .......................................................35

Address Offset Feature .................................85

Advanced Power Management (ABLE-3) feature

75

Appendix .......................................................193

B

BSMI mark ...................................................36

C

Cable noise interference ................................28

Capacity, formatted .......................................15

CE mark ........................................................36

Check Power Mode .......................................101

Command descriptions .................................97

Command overhead ......................................17

Command protocol .......................................91

Command table .............................................82

Commands Support Coverage ......................193

Conductive noise ...........................................27

Control electronics ........................................13

Corrosion test ................................................26

CSA approval ................................................37

C-TICK mark ................................................36

Cylinder allocation ........................................16

Cylinders/heads/sectors by model ................118

D

Data ...............................................................15

Data In commands ........................................91

Data Out Commands .....................................92

Data Reliability .............................................28

Data sheet ......................................................15

DC power requirements ................................27

Deviations from standard ..............................61

Device Configuration Overlay ......................102

Device Control Register ................................65

Discrete tone penalty ....................................36

Drive Address Register .................................65

Drive address setting .....................................55

Drive characteristics .....................................15

Drive handling precautions ...........................8

Drive ready time ...........................................19

E

Electrical interface specification ...................39

Electromagnetic compatibility ......................36

Emergency unload ........................................29

Environment ..................................................25

Execute Device Diagnostic ...........................105

F

Failure prediction (S.M.A.R.T.) ...................28

Features Register ...........................................67

Fixed-disk subsystem ....................................13

Fixed-disk subsystem description .................13

Flammability .................................................37

Flush Cache ...................................................106

Format Track .................................................108

Format Unit ...................................................109

H

Head disk assembly data ...............................13

Humidity .......................................................25

I

Identify Device .............................................110

Idle ................................................................119

Idle Immediate ..............................................120

IEC compliance .............................................37

L

Labels, Identification ....................................36

Latency, average ...........................................19

LBA High Register .......................................67

LBA Mid Register ........................................67

Load/unload ..................................................29

M

Magnetic fields .............................................27

Mechanical positioning .................................17

Mechanical specifications .............................31

Mode transition time .....................................20

Mounting hole locations ...............................32

Mounting orientation ....................................33

N

Non-data commands .....................................93

O

Operating modes

description ...............................................19

P

Packaging ......................................................37

Performance characteristics ..........................17

Physical cylinders .........................................16

PIO timings ...................................................45

Power consumption effiency ........................28

Power management commands ....................74

Power management features .........................74

Power-off considerations ..............................72

Power-Off Sequence .....................................30

Preventive maintenance ................................29

Protected Area Function ...............................83

R

Radiation noise .............................................26

Read Buffer ...................................................122

Read DMA ....................................................123

Read DMA EXT ...........................................125

Read Long .....................................................127

Read Native Max ADDRESS .......................132

Read Sectors .................................................134

Read Verify Sectors ......................................137

Recalibrate ....................................................141

Register .........................................................63

Register initialization ....................................70

Register set ....................................................63

Reset response ...............................................69

Reset timings .................................................44

S

S.M.A.R.T. Function ....................................77

Set ...........................................................160

Safety ............................................................37

Secondary circuit protection .........................37

Sector Addressing Mode ...............................73

Sector Count Register ...................................67

Sectors/Track ................................................16

Security Disable Password ............................142

Security Erase Unit .......................................144

Security Set Password ...................................147

Security Unlock ............................................149

Seek ...............................................................150

Seek Overlap .................................................87

Seek time

average ....................................................17

full stroke ................................................18

single track ..............................................18

Sense Condition ............................................151

Service life ....................................................29

Set Features ...................................................152

Set Max ADDRESS ......................................154

Set Max ADDRESS EXT .............................156

Set Multiple ...................................................158

shock .............................................................33

Signal definitions ..........................................40

Signal descriptions ........................................41

Sleep ..............................................................159

Sound power levels .......................................35

Specification .................................................25

Standby .........................................................175

Standby timer ................................................75

Status .............................................................75

Status Register ..............................................67

T

Temperature ..................................................25

Time-out values ............................................191

Transition time ..............................................76

U

UL approval ..................................................37

Hitachi Global Storage Technologies

V

Vibration .......................................................33

W

Write Buffer ..................................................177

Write Cache function ....................................87

Z

Zone ..............................................................16

© Copyright Hitachi Global Storage Technologies

Hitachi Global Storage Technologies

5600 Cottle Road

San Jose, CA 95193

Produced in the United States

9/03

All rights reserved Travelstar™ is a trademark of HitachiGlobal Storage Technologies.

Microsoft, Windows XP, and Windows are trademarks of

Microsoft Corporation in the United States, other countries, or both.

Other product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies.

References in this publication to Hitachi Global Storage

Technologies products, programs or services do not imply that Hitachi Global Storage Technologies intends to make these available in all countries in which Hitachi Global Storage Technologies operates.

Product information is provided for information purposes only and does not constitute a warranty.

Information is true as of the date of publication and is subject to change. Actual results may vary.

This publication is for general guidance only. Photographs may show design models.

19 September 2003

advertisement

Was this manual useful for you? Yes No
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Key Features

  • 60 GB 2.5" 4200 RPM Ultra-ATA/100
  • HDD
  • Storage drive buffer size: 8 MB
  • 99 g

Related manuals

Download PDF

advertisement

Table of contents